Samsung Tablet 10 1 Deep Gray User Guide

A N D R O I D  
T A B L E T  
User Manual  
Please read this manual before operating your  
device and keep it for future reference.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
THERETO. NOTHING CONTAINED IN THE INSTRUCTION MANUAL SHALL BE CONSTRUED TO CREATE AN EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WHATSOEVER WITH RESPECT TO THE PRODUCT. IN ADDITION, SAMSUNG SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND RESULTING FROM THE PURCHASE OR USE OF THE PRODUCT OR ARISING FROM THE BREACH OF  
THE EXPRESS WARRANTY, INCLUDING INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR LOSS OF ANTICIPATED PROFITS  
OR BENEFITS.  
SAMSUNG IS NOT LIABLE FOR PERFORMANCE ISSUES OR INCOMPATIBILITIES CAUSED BY YOUR EDITING OF REGISTRY SETTINGS,  
OR YOUR MODIFICATION OF OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE.  
USING CUSTOM OPERATING SYSTEM SOFTWARE MAY CAUSE YOUR DEVICE AND APPLICATIONS TO WORK IMPROPERLY.  
Samsung Electronics America (SEA), Inc  
Address:  
85 Challenger Road  
Ridgefield Park,  
New Jersey  
07660  
Toll Free  
1-800-SAMSUNG  
Telephone:  
Internet  
Address:  
©2012 Samsung Electronics America, Inc. All rights reserved.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Do you have questions about your Samsung Mobile Device?  
For 24 hour information and assistance, we offer a new FAQ/ARS System (Automated Response System) at:  
Nuance®, VSuite, T9® Text Input, XT9® Smart Input, and the Nuance logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Nuance  
Communications, Inc., or its affiliates in the United States and/or other countries.  
The Bluetooth® word mark, figure mark (stylized “B Design”), and combination mark (Bluetooth word mark and “B Design”) are  
registered trademarks and are wholly owned by the Bluetooth SIG.  
microSDTM, microSDHCTM, and the microSD logo are Trademarks of the SD Card Association.  
Google, the Google logo, Android, the Android logo, Google Play, Gmail, Google Calendar, Google Latitude, Google Maps, Google  
Play Books, Google Play Music, Google Talk, Picasa, and YouTube and other marks are trademarks of Google Inc.  
Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.  
is a trademark of SRS Labs, Inc. WOW HD technology is incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.  
Peel and the Peel logo are marks owned by Peel Technologies, Inc. and may be registered.  
®
, DivX , DivX Certified® and associated logos are trademarks of Rovi Corporation or its subsidiaries and are used under  
TM  
license.  
DivX Certified® to play DivX® video up to HD 1080p, including premium content.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO: DivX® is a digital video format created by DivX, LLC, a subsidiary of Rovi Corporation. This is an official DivX  
Certified® device that plays DivX video. Visit www.divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX  
videos.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play purchased DivX Video-on-  
Demand (VOD) movies. To obtain your registration code, locate the DivX VOD section in your device setup menu (Apps Settings  
About device Legal information License settings DivX® VOD Register). Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to  
complete your registration.  
>
>
>
>
>
>
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 6: Internet and Social  
Networking ............................................. 83  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 12: Health and Safety  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215  
Restricting Children's Access to  
Your Mobile Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227  
Information ........................................... 210  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 1: Getting Started  
This section helps you to quickly start using your device.  
Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this user manual  
Understanding This User Manual  
The sections of this manual generally follow the features of  
your device. A robust index for features begins on page 240.  
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.  
All screen images in this manual are simulated. Actual  
displays may vary depending on the software version of  
your device and any changes to the device’s settings.  
Also included is important safety information, beginning on  
page 210, that you should know before using your device.  
This manual gives navigation instructions according to the  
default display settings. If you select other settings,  
navigation steps may be different.  
Special Text  
In this manual, some text is set apart from the rest. This  
special text is intended to point out important information,  
share quick methods for activating features, define terms,  
and more. The definitions for these methods are as follows:  
Unless otherwise specified, all instructions in this manual  
assume that you are starting from a Home screen. To get to a  
Home screen, you may need to unlock the device. For more  
Notes: Presents alternative options for the current feature, menu,  
or sub-menu.  
Note: Instructions in this manual are based on default settings  
and may vary from your device depending on the  
software version on your device and any changes to the  
device’s settings.  
Tips: Provides quick or innovative methods or useful shortcuts.  
Important: Points out important information about the current  
feature that could affect performance.  
Warning: Brings important information to your attention that can  
help to prevent loss of data or functionality or damage to your  
device.  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Text Conventions  
Warning! Use only approved charging devices. Approved  
accessories are designed to maximize battery life.  
Using other accessories may invalidate your  
warranty and may cause damage.  
This manual provides condensed information about how to  
use your device. To make this possible, the following text  
conventions are used to represent often-used steps:  
Arrows are used to represent the sequence of selecting  
successiveoptionsinlonger,orrepetitive,procedures.For  
example:  
Battery Indicator  
The Battery icon  
in the Status Bar shows the battery  
From a Home screen, touch  
Display Screen timeout.  
Apps  
Settings  
power level. When battery power is 15% or less, your device  
prompts you to charge the battery. If you continue to operate  
the device without charging, the device powers off. For  
Battery  
Your device is powered by a rechargeable, standard Li-Ion  
battery. A Wall/USB Charger (Charging Head and USB cable)  
are included with the device for charging the battery.  
Tip: Touch the Time field to display battery charge status.  
Charging the Battery  
Your device comes with a Wall/USB Charger (Outlet  
Connector, Charging Head, and USB cable) to charge your  
device from any standard AC power outlet.  
Note: The battery comes partially charged. You must fully  
charge the battery before using your device for the first  
time.  
After the first charge, you can use the device while  
charging.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
6
     
2. Insert the USB cable into the device’s Charger/  
Note: The battery comes partially charged. You must fully  
charge the battery before using your device for the first  
time.  
Accessory Port (2).  
After the first charge, you can use the device while  
charging.  
1. Insert the USB cable into the Charging Head (1).  
3. Plug the Charging Head into a standard AC power  
Correct  
outlet.  
Warning! While the device is charging, if the touch screen  
does not function due to an unstable power supply,  
unplug the USB power adapter from the power outlet  
or unplug the USB cable from the device.  
Incorrect  
Charging  
Head  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. When charging is complete, unplug the Charging Head  
from the power outlet and remove the USB cable from  
the device.  
Turning Your Device Off  
1. Press and hold the Power/Lock Key  
.
2. At the prompt, touch Power off  
OK.  
Turning Your Device On and Off  
Setting Up Your Device  
Turning Your Device On  
When you first turn on your device, you are asked to set up a  
few things. To do that, the following screens display. Some  
screens can be skipped (touch Skip) or re-displayed (touch  
Back). Some screens display depending on the options you  
choose.  
Press and hold the Power/Lock Key  
.
Select Language  
Note: Your device’s internal  
antenna is located along the  
top back of the device. Do not  
block the antenna; doing so  
may affect signal quality and  
may cause the device to  
operate at a higher power level  
than is necessary. For more  
1. Touch the language field, scroll through the list, and  
touch the language you want your device to use, such  
as, English (United States).  
2. Touch Start  
.
Wi-Fi  
Make sure the Wi-Fi OFF / ON icon is set to ON  
choose one of the following options:  
and  
Touch Add Wi-Fi network to enter a Network SSID that is  
not listed.  
Touch Scan to make sure you have an accurate list of  
Wi-Fi networks.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8
     
Touch one of the Wi-Fi networks in the list, enter the  
password, and touch Connect. Touch and connect to  
another Wi-Fi network or touch Next to continue.  
– or –  
Touch Skip to perform this task later. For more  
Touch Skip to perform this task later. For more  
Make it Google  
Set Date and Time  
1. Touch the time zone field (GMT+00:00) and select the  
Your new device uses your Google account to fully use its  
Android features, including Gmail, Maps, Navigation, Google  
correct time zone.  
Talk, and Google PlayTM  
.
2. Under Date, set the date (month, day, year), if  
necessary.  
The Make it Google screen allows you to create a new  
Google account or sign in, if you already have a Google  
account.  
3. Under Time, set the time (hour, minute, and AM or PM),  
if necessary.  
Note: If you skipped Wi-Fi setup, the Wi-Fi setup screen  
4. Touch Next  
.
displays and you must connect through a Wi-Fi network.  
Samsung Account  
Sign in to your Samsung account to use Samsung services.  
1. Touch variety of services to learn more.  
Touch Sign in and then enter the email address and  
password of your existing account.  
– or –  
2. Touch Create new account to create a Samsung  
Touch Get an account or enter the email address and  
password of your existing account.  
– or –  
account.  
– or –  
Touch Sign in if you already have a Samsung account.  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Touch Not now to perform this task later. For more  
Use Google Location  
1. Read the information on the screen and enable either  
or both of the Google location services.  
2. Touch Next to continue.  
Enable Purchases  
This screen displays if you signed in to your Google account.  
This Tablet Belongs To ...  
To personalize the tablet with your name:  
1. Touch the First and Last fields and use the on-screen  
keyboard to enter you first and last name.  
Enter purchase information for your Google Play  
account and touch Save  
.
– or –  
2. Touch Next  
.
Touch Skip  
.
Free Dropbox Account  
To get a free 50 GB Dropbox account for two years:  
1. Touch Disclaimer to read a short disclaimer about this  
Backup and Restore  
This screen also displays if you signed in to your Google  
account.  
offer. Touch OK  
.
1. Read the backup and restore information.  
2. Touch Create a new Dropbox account, enter the required  
2. Enable either or both options.  
fields, and touch Register for Dropbox  
.
3. Touch Next  
.
– or –  
The Restoring screen displays while your information is  
being restored.  
Touch I already have an account to sign in to Dropbox.  
– or –  
Touch No thanks to skip this offer.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10  
Setup Complete  
Congratulations! Your device is set up and ready to use.  
Task Manager  
Your device can run applications simultaneously and some  
applications run in the background.  
Touch Finish  
.
Use Task Manager to see which applications are running on  
your device and to end running applications to extend battery  
life. You can also uninstall applications from your device and  
see how much memory is used by applications.  
The main Home screen displays.  
Retrieving Your Google Account  
Password  
A Google account password is required for Google  
applications. If you misplace or forget your Google Account  
password, follow these instructions to retrieve it:  
1. From your computer, use an Internet browser to  
Task Manager Pop-Up  
The Task manager pop-up provides information about Active  
applications and includes a RAM manager. It also has a link to  
the Task Manager application.  
navigate to http://google.com/accounts  
.
To access the Task manager pop-up:  
2. Once the URL loads, click on the Can’t access your  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Task manager  
Mini App Tray  
account? link and follow the on-screen instructions.  
.
Using Google Maps  
The Task manager pop-up displays.  
In order to use some applications related to Google Maps,  
you must first connect Wi-Fi. For more information, refer to  
2. Touch the Active applications tab to view applications  
running on your device. Touch  
to end an  
application or End all to stop all running applications.  
You must also enable location services to use Google Maps.  
Some features require Standalone or Google location  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
3. Touch the RAM manager tab to display the amount of  
Random Access Memory (RAM) currently in use. Touch  
Clear memory to clear inactive and background  
processes.  
– or –  
Touch  
Navigation and then touch Task manager  
.
2. Touch Active applications to view applications running  
on your device. Touch End to end an application or  
End all to end all running applications.  
4. Touch  
in the top right corner of the Task manager  
pop-up to close the application.  
3. Touch Downloaded to view applications installed from  
Google Play. Touch Uninstall to remove an application  
from your device.  
5. Touch  
in the top left corner to display the Task  
Manager application.  
Task Manager Application  
The Task Manager application provides information about  
4. Touch RAM manager to display the amount of Random  
Access Memory (RAM) currently in use. Touch Clear  
memory to clear inactive and background processes.  
5. Touch Storage to view internal (Device memory) and  
external (SD card) storage memory statistics.  
applications, including Active applications  
manager Storage, and Help  
To access the Task Manager:  
,
Downloaded, RAM  
,
.
1. Access Task Manager from the Task manager pop-up.  
6. Touch Help to view useful tips for extending battery life.  
– or –  
Add the Application monitor widget to a Home screen  
and then touch Active applications on the Application  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
12  
Memory Card  
Your device supports removable microSD™ or microSDHC™  
memory cards with maximum capacities of 64 GB  
(depending on the memory card manufacturer and type).  
Memory cards are used to store music, photos, videos, and  
other files.  
Correct  
Incorrect  
Note: You can only store music files that you own (from a CD  
or purchased with the device) on a memory card.  
Installing a Memory Card  
1. Open the Memory Card Slot cover and turn to expose  
the slot.  
2. With the gold contacts facing down, carefully slide the  
memory card into the slot (1), pushing gently until it  
clicks into place (2).  
3. Replace the Memory Card Slot cover.  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Gently press down on the memory card (1), so that  
it pops out from the slot, and carefully pull the card  
out (2).  
Removing a Memory Card  
Important! To prevent damage to information stored on the  
memory card, unmount the card before removing it  
from the device.  
5. Replace the Memory Card Slot cover.  
Galaxy Tab Accessories  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Storage  
2. Under SD card, touch Unmount SD card  
Apps  
Settings  
.
To find accessories for your Galaxy Tab:  
.
.
3. Open the Memory Card Slot cover and turn to expose  
the slot.  
Galaxy Tab accessories display.  
2. Use your model number to find compatible  
accessories.  
Securing Your Device  
By default, the device locks automatically when the screen  
times out or you can lock it manually. You can unlock the  
device using one of the default Unlock screens or, for  
increased security, use a personal screen unlock pattern.  
For more information about creating and enabling a Screen  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
14  
           
For other settings related to securing your device, see  
2. Swipe across the screen as shown.  
Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this User Manual  
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.  
Locking the device manually  
Press the Power/Lock Key  
.
.
Unlocking the Device  
1. Press the Power/Lock Key  
The Lock screen displays.  
The last screen you accessed displays.  
Tip: Touch one of the app shortcut icons and then swipe to  
launch that application.  
Note: You can customize the Lock screen and set the type of  
Screen Unlock you want to use (Face unlock, Pattern,  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
Tip: Volume Up is the end farthest from the Power/Lock Key.  
If your device has fatal errors, hangs up, or freezes, you may  
need to reset the device to regain functionality.  
3. Once the SAMSUNG logo appears, release the Power/  
Lock key while continuing to press the Volume Up key.  
4. Continue to press the Volume Up key until the Android  
system recovery screen displays.  
If your device is frozen and unresponsive, press and hold the  
Power/Lock Key for 8 to 10 seconds.  
Android System Recovery  
Android System Recovery is used for Google updates. The  
average user should never need to perform a system  
recovery.  
5. Release the Volume Up key.  
The following options are available:  
• reboot system now: Turns on your device.  
• apply update from external storage: Allows you to apply  
updates to your device.  
Note: If you entered this menu by mistake, use the Volume Up/  
Down key to select reboot system now, then press the  
Power/Lock Key  
to boot up.  
. Your device then continues  
• wipe data/factory reset: Deletes all data from the device  
except captured pictures and videos. For more information,  
To enter the Android System Recovery mode, follow these  
steps:  
1. Turn the device off.  
• wipe cache partition: Deletes all cache data, such as log files.  
• apply update from cache: Allows you to apply updates form  
the device cache.  
2. Press the Volume Up Key  
press the Power/Lock Key  
until the device switches on.  
and then  
at the same time  
6. Press the Volume Up/Down key to scroll up or down,  
then press the Power/Lock key to make a selection.  
Getting Started  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
16  
       
Section 2: Understanding Your Device  
This section outlines key features of your device and  
describes the screen and the icons that appear when the  
device is in use. It also shows how to navigate through the  
device.  
Messaging Features:  
TM  
Gmail  
Email (corporate and personal)  
Google Talk (Instant Messaging and Video Chat)  
TM  
HD Video Player (1080p)  
Features  
Codec: MPEG4, H.264, H.263, VC-1, DivX, VP8, WMV7/8,  
Sorenson Spark  
10.1-inch WXGA (1280x800) TFT (PLS) LCD touch screen  
TM  
Android Version 4.0.4, Ice Cream Sandwich  
Format: 3GP (MP4), WMV (ASF), AVI (DivX), MKV, FLV, WEBM  
Wi-Fi, 1.4 GHz quad-core processor  
®
®
DivX Certified to play DivX video up to HD 1080p, including  
®
®
Full HTML Web Browser with Adobe Flash Technology  
premium content  
®
Bluetooth 4.0 Wireless technology. For more information, refer  
Supports HDMI/MHL connections to connect electronic devices to  
high-definition televisions (HDTVs) and displays.  
Music player that supports MP3, AAC/AAC+/EAAC+, WMA,  
OGG (vorbis), FLAC, AC-3  
Built-in Wi-Fi technology (802.11 a/b/g/n)  
5 Megapixel camera and camcorder with flash, plus 1.9  
Megapixel forward-facing camera for video chat  
TM  
2 GB RAM memory and 16GB or 32GB on-board memory, which  
is used for data storage and access  
Full integration of Google applications (Gmail, YouTube  
,
TM  
Google Maps , and Voice Search)  
TM  
TM  
Support for microSD and microSDHC Memory Cards  
S Pen for writing and playing games  
Photo Gallery that supports GIF, AGIF, JPEG, PNG, BMP, WBMP,  
and WEBP formats  
®
Polaris Office provides a central place for managing your  
documents online or offline  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Preloaded applications such as Google PlayTM Store, Google  
5. S Pen: A built-in stylus that allows you to perform  
TM  
®
TM  
Play Books, Polaris Office, AllShare Play , and Samsung  
1
1
2
3
Warning! This device does not support some USB storage  
Front View  
1. External Speakers: Used in music or video playback,  
notification tones, and for other sounds.  
2. Light Sensor: Used to control screen brightness  
automatically and when taking photos with the  
Front-facing Camera.  
3. Front-facing Camera Lens: Used when taking photos or  
recording videos.  
4. Display Screen: The orientation of the display screen  
rotates with the tablet as you turn it. You can turn this  
5
4
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
18  
 
Top View  
The following items can be found on the top of your device as  
illustrated.  
Back and Bottom Views  
The following items can be found on the back and bottom of  
your device.  
1. 3.5mm Headset Jack: Plug in for headphones.  
1. Camera Lens: Used when taking photos or recording  
videos.  
2. Infrared Blaster: Used to emit infrared signals used for  
3. Memory Card Slot: Install a memory card for storage of  
files.  
2. Camera Flash: Used when taking photos.  
3. Microphone: Used for voice recording or video chat.  
4. Charger/Accessory Port: Plug in a USB cable for  
charging or to sync music and files.  
4. Volume Key: From a Home screen, press to adjust  
Master Volume. During music playback, press to adjust  
volume.  
1
2
5. Power/Lock Key: Press and hold to turn the device on or  
off. Press to lock the device or to wake the screen for  
unlocking.  
1
2
3
4
5
3
4
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Home Screen  
The Home screen is the starting point for using your device.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Note: Unless stated otherwise, instructions in this user manual  
start with the device unlocked, at the Home screen.  
1. Google Search: Search the web by typing or speaking.  
2. Home screen: The starting point for using your device.  
Place shortcuts, widgets and other items to customize  
your device to your needs.  
3. Widgets: Applications that run on the Home screen.  
Some widgets are found on the Home screen by  
14 15 16  
7
9
12  
13  
11  
10  
8
4. Current screen: Indicates which Home screen is being  
5. App Shortcuts: Shortcuts to common applications. For  
6. Apps: Display the Apps screen.  
7. Back: Return to the previous screen or option.  
8. Home: Display the central Home screen. Touch and  
hold to display the Task Manager pop-up.  
Tip: The area across the top of the screen is called the  
Application Bar.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
20  
     
9. Navigation: Open a list of thumbnail images of apps  
you have worked with recently. Touch an App to open  
it. Touch and hold to display the Apps screen. Touch  
and then touch Task manager to display the Task  
Manager.  
14. Notification Icons: Presents icons to show notifications  
from the system or from an application. Touch a  
Notification Icon to display more detail. For a list of  
15. Time: The current time. For more information, refer to  
10. Quick Launch: This softkey can be set to launch several  
different applications. The default setting is Screen  
16. Status Icons: Indicate the status of your tablet. Touch  
the Time / Status Icons area to display the Status  
11. Primary Shortcuts: Shortcuts to common features.  
These shortcuts are found on the Home screen by  
Extended Home Screen  
The Home screen consists of the Home panel, plus four  
panels that extend beyond the display width to provide more  
space for adding shortcuts and widgets.  
12. Mini App Tray: Shortcuts to apps that you can use  
anytime, such as a calculator, a memo pad, and a  
Slide your finger horizontally across the screen to scroll to  
the left or right side panels. As you scroll, the indicator at the  
top of the display shows your current position.  
13. System Bar: The area along the bottom of the Home  
screen where you can find navigation buttons and  
icons that show notifications, battery power, and  
connection details.  
Note: The center panel displays when you touch  
Home.  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Customizing the Home Screens  
Display Settings  
You can customize display screen settings to your  
To customize the Home screens to suit your preferences:  
1. Navigate to one of the Home screen panels.  
2. Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen  
pop-up displays.  
Adding and Removing Home Screen Panels  
Your device comes with seven Home screen panels. You can  
customize the Home screen by removing or adding panels.  
– or –  
Use the S Pen to touch and hold on the screen until the  
Home screen pop-up displays.  
Note: The panel in the center position displays when you touch  
Home  
.
3. Touch Add to Home screen, and then touch:  
• Apps and widgets to add app or widget shortcuts on the  
Home screen  
1. From a Home screen, pinch the screen from the left  
and right side to the center to display the editing  
screen.  
– or –  
• Folder to add a folder on a Home screen  
• Page to add or remove a Home screen. For more information,  
Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen  
pop-up displays. Under Add to Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Page  
.
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
22  
 
3. To rearrange the order of panels, touch and drag a  
panel to a new location.  
4. Touch  
Back to return to the Home screen  
Navigating Your Device  
Use command buttons and the touch screen to navigate.  
Command Buttons  
Back  
Touch  
step.  
Back to return to the previous screen, option, or  
2. Use these controls to configure panels:  
Delete: Touch and drag a panel to the Trash  
Note: When the on-screen keyboard is active,  
Close  
Keyboard displays.  
Can to remove the panel from the Home  
screen.  
Home  
Touch  
Navigation  
Touch  
Home to display the first center Home screen.  
Add: Touch to add a new panel, up to a total  
of seven. This option is available when less  
than seven panels have been added.  
Navigation to open a list of thumbnail images of  
apps you have worked with recently. Touch an App to open it.  
Default Home Page: Touch the Home icon at  
the upper right corner of a panel to set it as  
the default home screen.  
Touch Remove all to clear all thumbnail images.  
Touch Task manager to display the Task Manager.  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Screen Capture  
Application Bar  
The Application Bar is the area along the top of various  
application screens. It usually contains the Search and Menu  
icons, as well as other icons that are used to display options  
and settings.  
Touch  
Screen Capture to capture an image of the  
current screen and automatically save a copy of the  
screenshot to the clipboard.  
To view the screen shots:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Screen Navigation  
Touch  
Touch items to select or launch them. For example:  
Apps  
Screenshots.  
My Files  
.
2. Touch Root  
sdcard  
Pictures  
Touch the on-screen keyboard to enter characters or text.  
Touch a menu item to select it.  
3. Touch a screen capture file to display it.  
Note: This softkey can be modified to launch other  
Touch an application’s icon to launch the application.  
Touch and Hold  
Activate on-screen items. For example:  
Touch and hold a widget on the home screen to move it.  
Other Buttons  
Google Search  
Touch and hold on a field to display a pop-up menu of options.  
Swipe, Flick, or Slide  
Swipe, flick, or slide your finger vertically or horizontally  
across the screen. For example:  
Touch  
Google to search the web.  
Context-Sensitive Menus  
Context-sensitive menus offer options for features or  
screens. To access context-sensitive menus:  
Unlocking the screen.  
Scrolling the Home screens or a menu.  
Touch  
Menu to display a list of options.  
Touch an option in the list.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
24  
         
Pinch  
3. Touch Do not show again to keep the pop-up from  
displaying again, if desired, and then touch OK to  
remove the pop-up.  
Use two fingers, such as your index finger  
and thumb, to make an inward pinch  
motion on the screen, as if you are picking  
something up, or an outward motion by  
sweeping your fingers out.  
The first app screen displays on the left or top and the  
second app screen displays on the right or bottom,  
depending on whether your device is in landscape or  
portrait mode.  
For example:  
Pinch a photo in Gallery to zoom in.  
Pinch a webpage to zoom in or out.  
4. Work in either app as you normally would.  
5. Touch  
Remove screen to remove either app  
Multiscreen Viewing  
screen.  
The Multiscreen option is available for Email, Gallery,  
Internet, Polaris Office, S Note, and Video Player.  
To split the screen and display two apps:  
1. While viewing the first app, touch  
2. Touch the second app (Email Gallery  
Polaris Office S Note, or Video player).  
A pop-up displays with Multiscreen help information.  
Multiscreen  
.
,
,
Internet  
,
,
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
S Pen Settings  
S Pen  
There are several settings available that control the behavior  
of the S Pen. For example, you can choose a sound that will  
play when you remove the S Pen from or return it to the slot  
in your device.  
The S Pen is a stylus that assists you in performing different  
functions. By using the Pen button, you can minimize having  
to switch between touch and pen input.  
Instead of the default menu of shortcuts that displays when  
you remove the S Pen from your device, you can change the  
setting so that the S Note, S Planner, Crayon physics, PS  
Touch, or Polaris Office app launches.  
Also, there is a setting to display a hovering pen icon on the  
screen when the pen tip is near the screen.  
1
2
Plus, there is a setting that helps to conserve battery power  
by causing your tablet not to try to detect the S Pen when it is  
in its slot in your tablet.  
1. Pen button: by pressing the Pen button, you can add  
functionality to the S Pen. For more information, refer  
to “Using the S Pen” on page 27.  
2. Stylus tip: the tip of the S Pen is used for tapping the  
screen.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
26  
 
Removing the S Pen From Your Device  
The S Pen is conveniently stored in your device to make it  
Using the S Pen  
There are several different functions you can perform by  
easy to find.  
using the S Pen.  
S Pen Screen Operations  
The S Pen can be used for various screen operations.  
To remove the S Pen, follow these steps:  
1. Locate the S Pen at the  
lower right corner of the  
Touch a command button, such as  
Back, or icons, such as  
Apps or Email, with the S Pen instead of your finger.  
device (1).  
The result is the same.  
To sweep to the next screen, touch and drag the screen to the left  
or right.  
2. Use your fingernail or  
a sharp object to pull  
the end of the S Pen  
out of the device (2).  
To move to a previous screen, hold the S Pen button and touch  
and drag the screen to the left. The previous screen is displayed.  
3. Pull the S Pen out of the  
device (3).  
Press S Pen button  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Launch S Note Mini App  
S Pen Screen Capture  
S Note Mini App is an application that you can launch from  
any screen to take quick notes or jot down ideas.  
To capture a screen image, hold the S Pen button and press  
and hold the S Pen anywhere on the screen. Files are saved  
in the Screenshots folder. For more information, refer to  
To open the S Note Mini App, hold the S Pen button and  
Press S Pen button  
Press S Pen button  
For information on using your S Pen with the S Note  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
28  
2. Touch a notification summary to respond to it.  
3. Touch outside the Status Details screen to close the  
window.  
Notifications  
When you receive a notification, the Notification icons display  
in the System Bar, to the left of the Time. Notifications  
indicate the arrival of Gmail, Email, alarms, and more.  
Quick Settings  
Touch a Notification icon for more detail. For example, touch  
a Gmail Notification icon to see who sent the message.  
To view and control the most common settings for your  
tablet, as well as accessing the complete Settings  
application, open the Quick Settings panel.  
1. Touch the Time in the System Bar.  
Touch the Time field to open the Notifications list to view all  
of your current notifications. Touch a Notification in the list to  
display the item. For example, touch a Gmail entry to open  
the Gmail application and view the message.  
The Quick Settings pop-up displays.  
Most apps that send notifications, such as Gmail and Google  
Talk, have individual settings that can be configured. See the  
settings for individual applications in the applicable section  
of this user manual.  
Status Details  
To display the current date and time, battery status, and  
Wi-Fi connectivity status, open Status Details.  
1. Touch the Time in the Status Bar.  
The Status Details display. If you have any current  
notifications, their summaries are listed below the  
Notifications title.  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
2. Touch the time at the top of the pop-up to display a  
Date and time pop-up. Touch Use 24-hour format to  
enable the 24-hour format. Touch Set date and time to  
display the Date & time settings screen. For more  
3. The Quick Settings are:  
• Power saving: When enabled, your device automatically  
analyzes the screen and adjusts the brightness to conserve  
Sweep the pop-up to the left to see additional settings.  
• Notification: Touch to enable or disable system and application  
• Wi-Fi: Touch to enable or disable Wi-Fi. For more information,  
• GPS: Touch to enable or disable Standalone GPS services. For  
• Bluetooth: Touch to enable or disable Bluetooth. For more  
• Driving mode: New notifications are read aloud when enabled.  
• Sync: Synchronizes your device with the network.  
Synchronizes contacts, email, time, and a variety of accounts.  
• Brightness: Touch and drag the slider to set the brightness or  
touch Auto to allow the device to set brightness automatically  
based on available light and battery charge status. For more  
• Settings: Touch to open the Settings application. For more  
• Sound / Vibrate / Mute: Touch to enable or disable sound  
mode.  
• Screen rotation: When On the screen rotates automatically  
from landscape to portrait and vice versa. When Off the screen  
is fixed in the current mode, either portrait or landscape. For  
• Notifications: Displays system notifications. For more  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
30  
4. Touch Clear to remove Notification Icons from the  
System Bar.  
Samsung account: Set up your Samsung account.  
5. Touch a notification entry to display the details.  
6. Close the Quick Settings by touching in the upper,  
X
Software update: There is a software update  
right corner of the Quick Settings pop-up or by  
touching outside the Quick Settings screen.  
available for this device.  
Updates Available: Updates to the applications you  
Quick Settings also display icons under the Notifications  
heading to alert you to activity on the tablet such as new  
messages, application downloads, software updates, and  
more. The following table lists those icons.  
have downloaded are available.  
Wi-Fi networks available: An open Wi-Fi network is  
in range.  
Download Successful: A recent application download  
or update completed successfully.  
Status Bar  
The Status Bar is part of the System Bar and displays icons  
to show network status, battery power, and other details.  
Google Talk Invitation: Someone has invited you to  
chat using Google Talk.  
Battery Level: Shown fully charged.  
Navigation Active: The Navigation App is active. For  
Charging Indicator: Battery is charging.  
New Email Message: You have new email. Touch  
Reply to view and answer the email.  
New Gmail Message: You have new Gmail. Touch the  
icon for additional information.  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Device Power Critical: Battery has only three percent  
power remaining. At about 15 percent power  
remaining, a popup is displayed to remind you to  
charge immediately.  
Set up input methods: When the keyboard is being  
displayed, touch this icon to display a menu of quick  
keyboard settings.  
Bluetooth Active: Bluetooth is turned on. For more  
USB Connection Indicator: The device is connected  
to a computer using a USB cable, but it is not  
charging. The battery is only charged while  
connected to a computer, if the device is turned off.  
When the device is off, press the Power/Lock key to  
see the battery charging indicator.  
Bluetooth Connected: Your device is connected to a  
Bluetooth device.  
Music App: A song is playing in the Music app.  
Touch the Music icon or touch the Status Details to  
see the song title and music player controls. For  
Battery Fully Charged: When the battery is fully  
charged, this indicator is displayed.  
USB Connected: Device is connected to a computer  
using a USB cable. Displays in upper left corner of  
screen.  
Music player: A song is playing. Touch the Music  
icon or touch the Status Details to see the song title  
and music player controls. For more information,  
Download in progress: An application is being  
downloaded to the device.  
Wi-Fi Active: Wi-Fi is connected, active, and  
Airplane Mode: Indicates that the Airplane Mode is  
active, which allows you to use many of your  
device’s features, but it cannot access online  
information or applications.  
communicating with a Wireless Access Point (WAP).  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
32  
Primary Shortcuts  
Primary Shortcuts appear at the bottom of the main Home  
screen.  
Wi-Fi Direct: Displays when Wi-Fi Direct is active  
and your tablet is connected to another device. For  
Tip: The main Home screen is usually the center Home screen.  
GPS Active: Displays when GPS is active.  
The default Primary Shortcuts are: S Note, S Planner,  
PS Touch, Smart Remote, Maps, Internet, Samsung Apps,  
and Play Store.  
Alarm Set: Displays when you set an alarm to ring at  
There are also application shortcuts on the second Home  
screen, which are: Email, Camera, Polaris Office, Dropbox,  
ChatON, B&N Nook, Netflix, and Settings.  
Event: This is a notification for one or more events.  
Screenshot Captured: A screenshot has been  
Application shortcuts can be added to any Home screen. For  
Widgets  
Nearby Devices: The Nearby devices setting is  
When you first turn on your tablet, there are various widgets  
on the center Home screen. They can also appear on the  
Home screens to the left and right of the center Home  
screen.  
Smart stay: Set the screen to stay on as long as you  
Widgets are self-contained applications that you can place  
on the Home screens to access your favorite features.  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Adding Widgets to a Home screen  
1. Navigate to the Home screen on which you want to  
place the Widget.  
Widget Options  
The following widgets are available.  
AllShare Cast: To share your device’s screen with another  
device, enable AllShare Cast. For more information, refer to  
2. From that Home screen, touch  
Apps.  
3. Touch the Widgets tab.  
Application monitor: This application acts as a task manager  
that monitors and controls active or downloaded programs, RAM,  
Note: Swipe across the screen horizontally to view all Widgets.  
4. Touch and hold the widget’s icon, then slide your finger  
where you want to place the icon and release it.  
Assistive light: Touch this widget to use the camera flash, on the  
back of the device, as an assistive light. Touch the widget again to  
turn off the light.  
Note: There must be room on the screen where you want to  
place the widget, otherwise the widget will not add to  
the Home screen.  
B&N Nook: Use the Barnes & Noble Nook application to download  
books for reading right on your device. This widget comes in two  
5. Touch  
Back to return to the Home screen.  
Removing Widgets  
Book: Touch this widget and then touch a book for quick access  
Touch and hold the Widget until the  
Delete icon  
displays, then drag the Widget toward the top of the  
screen and drop it over the Delete icon.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
34  
 
Bookmark: Choose one of your bookmarks then touch the widget  
Dual clock (digital): Display the date and time for two  
different locations using a digital format. For more  
Email: Display your email inbox. For more information, refer to  
Calendar: Displays a list of your events. For more  
Clock (funky): Display a funky, analog clock.  
Email account: Access an Email account. Appears once an Email  
account is set up. If you have more than one Email account set  
up, touch the one to which you want to link. For more information,  
Clock (modern): Display a modern, analog clock.  
Contact: Display a link to one of your contacts to quickly  
compose an Email or Gmail message. For more information, refer  
Game Hub: Access social and premium games. Join Game Hub to  
enjoy free games with your friends. For more information, refer to  
Contact: Display a shortcut to one of your contact entries. For  
Digital clock: Display the digital time, the day, and the date.  
Directions & Navigation: Get directions and navigation from  
Gmail: Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based  
Gmail label: Access a Gmail label. Displays once a Gmail account  
is set up. Touch the label to which you want to link. For more  
TM  
Dropbox Folder: An application that let’s you take your photos,  
docs, and videos anywhere. For more information, refer to  
Google Play Books: Read eBooks from the web-based  
Google Play Books service. For more information, refer to  
Dual clock (analog) Display the date and time for two  
:
different locations using analog clocks. For more  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Google Play Music: Use this widget to control the playback of  
songs playing in the Music app. For more information, refer to  
Music Player: The Music Player allows you to play music files  
that you have stored on your device and memory card. You can  
Google Search: Display a Google Search bar. For more  
Music playlist: Choose a music playlist to access from a home  
TM  
Google+ photos: Display a shortcut to Google+ photos. For  
Google+ posts: Display a shortcut to Google+ posts. For more  
Negative colors: Add and touch this widget to display all screens  
in negative colors. Touch the widget again to reset to default  
colors.  
TM  
Latitude : Displays your current location. Touch the location to  
Picture frame: Allows you to select one or more pictures and then  
touch the arrow on the widget for a slide show. For more  
open Maps, touch the check mark to open the Check in at pop-  
up, or touch the Refresh button to update your Latitude list of  
Media Hub: Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest  
movie and TV content. You can rent or purchase your favorite  
content and watch from the convenience of anywhere. For more  
Play Store: Download applications from the Google Play™ Store.  
S Bookmarks: Create bookmarks for your favorite websites. For  
S Planner (mini today): Use S Planner to organize events and  
Mono audio: Enable mono sound when listening to audio with  
one earbud.  
Music Hub: Allows you to purchase and download songs.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
36  
S Planner (month): Use S Planner to organize events and tasks for  
Weather  
widget to choose locations.  
Yahoo! Finance Search for and add stocks. For more  
Yahoo! News: Display current news and much more from Yahoo!  
YouTube: Search YouTube and watch videos. For more  
:
Display the forecast from AccuWeather. Touch the  
:
S Planner (task): Use S Planner to view and edit tasks. For more  
S Suggest: Recommends popular applications, when your device  
is connected to a Wi-Fi, that are guaranteed to be compatible with  
App Shortcuts  
Settings shortcut: Allows you to create a shortcut to a particular  
Use App Shortcuts for quick access to applications or  
features, such as Email or other applications.  
1. Navigate to the Home screen on which you want to  
place the App Shortcut.  
Software update: This shortcut makes updating your device  
2. Touch  
Apps.  
– or –  
Traffic: Enter a name for the widget and a destination, and then  
touch Save. Touch the widget to use the Traffic component of the  
Touch and hold on the screen until the Home screen  
options pop-up displays.  
Touch Add to Home screen  
App and widgets.  
3. Touch the Apps tab.  
Video Player: Play and manage videos stored on your tablet. For  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
4. Touch and hold the application icon, then slide your  
finger where you want to place the icon and release it.  
3. Touch Home screen  
,
Lock screen, or Home and lock  
screens  
.
The Select wallpaper from pop-up displays the  
following options:  
5. Touch and hold the App Shortcut and then drag the  
• Gallery: Access the Gallery to select a photo. Touch a photo to  
select it. Crop and resize the picture, if desired. Touch Done to  
save the picture as wallpaper. Touch Cancel to cancel.  
application icon to reposition it on the Home screen.  
Removing App Shortcuts  
• Live wallpapers: Choose from pre-loaded interactive animated  
wallpapers. Touch a wallpaper to see an example. If available,  
touch Settings to view options for the selection. Touch Set  
Touch and hold the App Shortcut until  
Delete  
displays at the top of the screen, then drag the App  
Shortcut to the Delete icon.  
wallpaper to save your choice. Touch  
Back to return to  
Wallpapers  
the Live wallpapers menu.  
You can choose a picture to display on the Home Screen,  
Lock screen, or to both the Home and Lock screens. Choose  
from preloaded wallpaper images or select a photo you have  
downloaded or taken with the Camera.  
• Wallpapers: Choose from pre-loaded wallpaper images. Touch  
an image to view it. Touch Set wallpaper to save it as  
wallpaper. Touch  
Back to return to the Home screen.  
1. From a Home screen, touch and hold on the screen.  
Note: Live wallpapers is not available for the Lock screen.  
The Home screen options pop-up displays.  
2. Touch Set wallpaper for  
.
The Set wallpaper for pop-up displays.  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
38  
   
3. Touch one of the icons to  
display a mini app pop-up.  
The pop-up varies depending  
on the application. Various  
controls display at the top of  
the pop-up and other  
Mini App Tray  
There are shortcuts available that link to apps that you might  
need while working in other apps, such as Alarm, Calculator,  
Email, Music player, S Note, S Planner, Task manager, and  
World clock. In some cases, these shortcuts are actually links  
to the part of the app you need most and they contain a link  
to the actual app where you can use other functions.  
information is displayed in  
the body of the pop-up.  
1. From any screen, touch  
Mini App Tray at the  
bottom, center of the screen.  
4. Touch options (such as  
) to create new app items  
The Mini App Tray icons display.  
(such as alarms or events).  
5. Touch items in the body of the pop-up, such as an  
email entry or keys on the Calculator.  
6. Touch  
7. Touch to close the mini app pop-up.  
to link to the application. For more  
2. Touch Edit at the right side of the tray to customize the  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
You can place shortcuts to applications on the Home screen  
for quick access to the application. For more information,  
Customizing the Mini App Tray  
You can choose applications to display on the Mini App Tray  
and arrange them in any order.  
To view your downloaded applications:  
1. From any screen, touch  
Mini App Tray at the  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu Downloaded applications to view  
downloaded apps.  
Apps.  
bottom, center of the screen.  
2. Touch Edit at the right side of the tray.  
3. Touch and drag apps in and out of the tray or to  
another position in the tray.  
3. Touch an icon on the Downloaded applications screen  
to launch the application.  
– or –  
4. Touch Done to save your changes.  
Apps Screen  
Add an App Shortcut to a Home screen by dragging the  
App icon onto the Home Screen. For more information,  
The Apps screen holds all applications installed on your  
wireless device. Applications that you download and install  
from Google Play™ or from the web are also added to a  
Home screen.  
Application Information  
To view information about an App, such as the amount of  
storage it uses, force the App to stop, uninstall updates, and  
clear data:  
The Apps icons are arranged in a customizable grid.  
To change the order of the icons on the Apps screen:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu Edit  
Apps.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps.  
.
2. Touch and hold an App icon, then drag it to  
App info to open a screen with details about  
the App.  
3. Touch and hold an icon and drag it to a new position.  
4. Touch Save to save the changes.  
Understanding Your Device  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Touch  
Back to return to the Home screen.  
Calculator: The calculator provides the basic  
arithmetic functions to solve simple arithmetic  
problems and advanced operators to solve more  
Applications  
The following is an alphabetical list of the applications that  
come preloaded on your device.  
Alarm: Schedule alarms to remind you of  
appointments or events, or as a wake-up. For more  
Camera: Take photos or record videos. A shortcut to  
Camera displays on a Home screen by default. For  
AllShare PlayTM: Share your on-device media content  
withotherexternaldevicesusing DLNA(DigitalLiving  
Network Alliance) and built-in AllShare Play  
ChatON: A smart-messaging app that gives you a  
host of innovative ways to stay connected with all  
your friends and family, regardless of their device or  
platform. A shortcut to ChatON displays on a Home  
B&N Nook: Use the Barnes & Noble Nook application  
to download books for reading right on your device.  
A shortcut to B&N Nook displays on a Home screen  
Contacts: Save and manage contact information for  
your friends and colleagues. For more information,  
Crayon physics: Crayon Physics Deluxe is a game  
that uses two-dimensional physics, including  
gravity, mass, kinetic energy, and transfer of  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Downloads: Files, apps, and other items you  
download in Internet, Gmail, Email, or in other  
ways, are stored on your tablet’s internal storage.  
Use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or delete  
what you have downloaded. For more information,  
Game Hub: Access social and premium games. Join  
Game Hub to enjoy free games with your friends.  
Gmail: Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s  
Dropbox: Provides access to your personal  
computer files directly from your device. Let’s you  
take your photos, docs, and videos anywhere. A  
shortcut to Dropbox displays on a Home screen by  
Google+: Share updates and see what is going on  
around you with Google+. For more information,  
Internet: Access the Internet. A shortcut to Internet  
displays on the main Home screen by default. For  
Email: Send and receive email from your device. A  
shortcut to Email displays on a Home screen by  
Latitude: Use Google Latitude to locate your friends  
on a map and share or hide your location. For more  
Gallery: View and manage photos stored on your  
Maps: Find locations and get directions with Google  
maps. A shortcut to Maps displays on the main  
Home screen by default. For more information, refer  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
42  
Media Hub: Browse the latest movies and TV shows,  
then rent or purchase the media for viewing on your  
Netflix: Instantly watch TV shows and movies,  
streaming from Netflix. A shortcut to Netflix displays  
on a Home screen by default. For more information,  
Messenger: With Google MessengerTM, you can  
bring groups of friends together into a simple group  
Places: Use Google PlacesTM and Google Maps to  
find places of interest and to add your own favorite  
Music Hub: Allows you to purchase and download  
Play Books: Read eBooks from the web-based  
Google Play Books service. For more information,  
Music Player  
:
Play music and other audio files that you  
Play Movies: Use the Play Movies app to view  
movies you rent from Google Play™ Movies or play  
any of your personal videos stored on your tablet.  
copy from your computer. For more information, refer  
My Files: Find, view and manage files stored on an  
optional installed memory card. For more  
Play Music: Play music and other audio files that you  
copy from your computer with the Music app. For more  
Navigation: Use Google Maps NavigationTM to  
search for locations, with turn-by-turn directions.  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Play Store: Browse, download, and install Android  
applications. A shortcut to Play Store displays on  
S Planner: Record events and appointments to  
manage your schedule. A shortcut to S Planner  
displays on the main Home screen by default. For  
Polaris Office: This application provides a central  
place for managing your documents online or  
offline. A shortcut to Polaris® Office displays on a  
Home screen by default. For more information, refer  
PS Touch: Adobe® Photoshop® Touch lets you  
quickly combine images, apply professional effects,  
share the results with friends and family through  
social networking sites, and more. A shortcut to PS  
Touch displays on the main Home screen by default.  
S Suggest: Recommends popular applications,  
when your device is connected to a Wi-Fi, that are  
guaranteed to be compatible with your device. For  
Samsung Apps: Connect to Samsung Apps and  
make your smart device even smarter. Simply and  
easily download an abundance of applications to  
your device such as games, news, reference, social  
networking, navigation, and more. A shortcut to  
Samsung Apps displays on the main Home screen  
S Note: Use S Note to create notes with productivity  
tools that turn handwriting into typed text and  
correct drawn shapes, lines, and formulas to make  
them perfect. A shortcut to S Note displays on the  
main Home screen by default. For more  
Screensaver: When your tablet screen automatically  
times out, instead of a blank screen, enable the  
Galaxy Note 10.1 Screensaver, which is actually an  
action-packed video tour of all the fantastic features  
that you will find on your Galaxy Note. For more  
Understanding Your Device  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
44  
Search: Search the web by typing or speaking. For  
Video maker: Create a movie, using a video you  
download or record with Camera, or by combining  
images. Add audio, to create a soundtrack, then  
share your movie with your friends. For more  
Settings: Configure your device to your preferences.  
A shortcut to Settings displays on a Home screen by  
Video Player: Play and manage videos stored on  
Smart Remote: Locate and watch programming on  
your tv and then control your entertainment system  
with gestures from the device. A shortcut to Smart  
Remote displays on the main Home screen by  
World Clock: View the date and time in any time  
YouTube: View and upload YouTube videos, right  
Talk: Chat with other Google Talk users. For more  
Textbooks: The KnoTM App is a digital eTextbook  
reader that provides a unique learning experience  
on tablet devices. You can read both eTextbooks  
and PDFs seamlessly with all the formatting  
designed by the author and publisher along with  
many special features. For more information, refer  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Section 3: Entering Text  
This section describes how to enter words, letters,  
punctuation and numbers when you need to enter text.  
Text Input Methods  
Your device offers two text input methods.  
Samsung Keyboard  
Google voice typing: You can use your voice to enter text  
using the Voice input feature. Your device recognizes your  
speech and enters text for you. For more information, refer  
Your device uses a virtual QWERTY keyboard for text entry  
called the Samsung keyboard. Use the keyboard to enter  
letters, punctuation, numbers, and other characters into text  
entry fields or applications. Access the keyboard by touching  
any text entry field.  
Samsung keyboard: The Samsung keyboard is also a virtual  
QWERTY keyboard that allows you to enter text by touching keys  
on the screen. The Samsung keyboard includes predictive text,  
which matches your key touches to common words so that you  
can select the word to enter it into your text.  
The keyboard displays at the bottom of the screen. By  
default, when you rotate the device, the screen orientation  
updates to display the keyboard at the bottom of the screen.  
Changing the Input Method  
When entering text, you can select the text input method.  
1. Touch  
Set up input methods in the Status bar.  
The Set up input methods pop-up displays.  
2. Touch an input method to activate it.  
3. Touch  
to display that input method’s settings.  
Entering Text  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Keyboard Types  
Using the Samsung Keyboard  
In addition to the default QWERTY keyboard, there are two  
other types of the Samsung keyboard: a Floating keyboard  
and a Split keyboard.  
The Samsung keyboard is a custom virtual QWERTY  
keyboard, featuring predictive text. Input characters by  
touching the on-screen keys with your finger or use speech  
recognition.  
To change the keyboard type:  
As you enter characters, predictive text matches your key  
touches to common words and displays them. Select a word  
from the display to insert it into your text. For more  
1. Use two fingers, such as your index  
finger and thumb, to make an inward  
pinch motion on the screen, where  
the keyboard is displayed.  
information, refer to “Using XT9 Predictive Text” on page 49.  
Your tablet also provides handwriting recognition to make the  
task of text entry that much easier.  
A pop-up displays the three keyboard types.  
Delete  
Key  
New  
Paragraph  
2. Touch one of the keyboard types to display it.  
The Split keyboard can be moved up and down and the  
Floating keyboard can be moved anywhere.  
Shift  
Key  
Tap and hold with two fingers to move the Floating or  
Split keyboard.  
Space  
Bar  
Settings  
Select  
Language  
Clipboard  
Text  
Input  
Mode  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Keyboard  
To configure the Samsung keyboard to your preferences:  
Entering Symbols and Numbers  
The number keys are displayed at the top of the keyboard  
and are always available.  
Touch  
Set up input methods in the Status bar and  
To enter common symbols, touch  
mode, then touch the corresponding key.  
to switch to Symbols  
then touch  
up input methods pop-up.  
– or –  
next to Samsung keyboard in the Set  
There are two pages of symbols. Touch  
next page.  
to switch to the  
Touch  
Settings on the keyboard.  
Touch and hold a vowel key (A, E, I, O, U, or Y) or the C, N, or  
S key to open a small window where you can chose an  
accented vowel or other alternate letter. Slide to the letter  
until it is highlighted, and release.  
The Samsung keyboard settings screen displays.  
Touch and hold the Period key ( . ) to open a small window  
with a set of common symbols.  
Entering Upper and Lower Case Letters  
The default case is lower case (abc). Enter upper and lower  
Other Keyboard Functions  
case alphabet letters by touching the Shift key  
the case, before touching the letter key(s).  
to toggle  
Touch  
to select the language, if more than one language  
Touch once to switch from abc to Abc mode.  
has been set. The current language displays on the space  
bar.  
Touch twice to switch to ABC mode. When ABC mode is enabled,  
the Shift key background turns blue.  
Touch and hold  
Settings and slide to  
to use the  
Touch  
to view the clipboard and manage saved text.  
Entering Text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
48  
 
6. Begin typing a word.  
Using XT9 Predictive Text  
XT9 is a predictive text system that has next-letter prediction  
and regional error correction, which compensates for users  
pressing the wrong keys on QWERTY keyboards.  
A list of word options displays.  
1. Touch  
The Set up input methods pop-up displays.  
2. Touch Set up input methods  
The Language and input settings screen displays.  
3. Touch next to Samsung keyboard to display  
Samsung keyboard settings.  
Set up input methods in the Status bar.  
.
4. Touch the Predictive text OFF / ON icon  
to turn  
Predictive text ON.  
5. Touch the Predictive text field to modify XT9 associated  
7. Touch  
to display more words.  
To add more words, see “Adding Words To Your Word  
List” on page 50.  
Note: The XT9 option is available only when ABC mode has  
8. Continue typing your message. XT9 mode can be used  
been selected.  
in portrait or landscape mode.  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Adding Words To Your Word List  
To add more word options:  
Editing Text  
You can edit the text you enter in text fields by cutting,  
copying, or pasting text. These operations can be performed  
within and across apps. However, some apps do not support  
editing some or all of the text displayed while others may  
offer their own way to select text.  
Editing Existing Text  
To edit text that you have entered:  
1. Touch  
The Set up input methods pop-up displays.  
2. Touch Set up input methods  
The Language and input settings screen displays.  
3. Touch next to Samsung keyboard to display  
Samsung keyboard settings.  
4. Touch Predictive text My word list  
5. Touch Add word  
6. Use the on-screen keyboard to enter the word.  
7. Touch Done  
Set up input methods in the Status bar.  
.
1. Touch the text at the point you want to edit.  
.
The  
Cursor displays at the point you touched.  
.
2. Touch and drag the Cursor to a better position, if  
necessary.  
.
3. Enter additional text or delete text by repeatedly  
Deleting Words From Your Word List  
To delete words from your word list:  
1. Navigate to My word list. For more information, refer to  
“Adding Words To Your Word List” on page 50.  
touching the  
Delete key.  
Copying, Deleting, or Replacing Text  
To select and copy, delete, or replace text:  
1. Touch and hold the text or word you want to select.  
2. Touch  
3. Touch the existing words you want to delete or touch  
Select all, and then touch Done  
4. Touch Delete  
Delete.  
The selected text is highlighted with a  
each end of the selection.  
tab at  
.
2. Touch and drag either tab to select more or less text.  
.
Entering Text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
50  
Pasting Text  
To paste previously copied text:  
Tip: Touch Select all in the Application bar to select all text in  
the field. Touch on another area of the screen or touch  
Done to deselect the text.  
1. Touch the text at the point you wantto paste the copied  
text.  
The  
Cursor displays at the point you touched.  
3. Depending on the action you want to take for the  
selected text, in the Application bar touch:  
• Select all to highlight all text in the field.  
• Cut to remove the selected text.  
2. Touch the Cursor.  
A pop-up displays.  
3. Touch Paste in the pop-up.  
• Copy to save the selected text to the clipboard.  
– or –  
To paste text directly from the clipboard:  
1. Touch the  
Clipboard key to display the text saved  
Enter text by typing or speaking to replace the  
selection with what you type.  
to the clipboard.  
2. Touch a text block to paste that text where the Cursor is  
– or –  
positioned.  
Touch the  
Delete key to delete the selected text.  
Closing the Keyboard  
To close the keyboard:  
Touch  
Close Keyboard.  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
As you write, suggestions are offered in the word options  
area in case the correct letters were not recognized.  
Using the Handwriting Feature  
You can enter text simply by using your finger or the S Pen to  
handwrite letters on your screen.  
Input Writing /  
Line Return  
Display  
Keyboard  
1. From a screen where you can enter text, activate the  
keyboard by touching a text input field on the screen.  
Clipboard  
Numbers  
and  
Symbols  
Text  
Input  
Mode  
Delete Select  
Word  
Options  
2. If necessary, touch  
Set up input methods in the  
Space  
Key  
Key  
Language  
Status bar and then touch Samsung keyboard  
.
The Samsung keyboard displays.  
3. Touch and hold  
Settings and slide to  
.
The handwriting pad displays.  
4. Use your finger tip or the S Pen to write out each  
character.  
Note: To properly recognize the written characters and to  
prevent scratching of the LCD, do not use script.  
Handwriting  
area  
Entering Text  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Recognition time: Set the time it takes for your tablet to  
recognize what you write. Choose from 100ms, 300ms,  
500ms, 1000ms, or 2000ms.  
Handwriting Tips  
For uppercase letters, write the letter larger than the lowercase  
letters.  
• Pen thickness: Change the pen thickness to 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9  
pixels, as the examples demonstrate.  
Write a dash (horizontal line) to add a space.  
Delete words by sweeping backward across them.  
• Pen color: Change the pen color to black, red, blue, green, or  
brown.  
To display numbers and symbols, touch  
and then touch a  
number or symbol key. Touch the button marked 1/2 or 2/2 to see  
• Recognition type: Set the way your tablet recognizes what you  
write.  
more symbols and emoticons. Touch  
and symbols keyboard.  
to exit the numbers  
.
Complete recognition: The letters are not entered in the text  
To return to the Samsung keyboard, touch  
field until you touch  
word options.  
Enter, which gives you time to choose  
Handwriting Settings  
To change the Handwriting settings:  
Stroke recognition: The letters are entered in the text field as  
you write.  
1. Touch  
The Language and input settings screen displays.  
2. Touch next to Samsung keyboard to display  
Samsung keyboard settings.  
3. Touch Handwriting  
The following settings can be changed:  
and then touch Set up input methods.  
• Gesture guide: Displays a list of gesture that can be used with  
the handwriting feature.  
Tutorial: Displays information for entering handwritten text.  
• About: Describes the version and manufacturer of the  
handwriting software.  
.
4. Press  
repeatedly to return to your message.  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. At the Listening prompt, speak clearly and distinctly  
into the microphone.  
Using Speech Recognition  
You can use your voice to enter text using the Voice input  
feature, which lets you enter text by speaking. The Samsung  
keyboard recognizes your speech and enters text for you.  
The software converts your voice to text, which is  
displayed in the message.  
1. Touch  
Set up input methods in the Status bar and  
3. Keep speaking to add more test.  
then touch Google voice typing in the Set up input  
methods pop-up to enable Voice Input  
4. Touch Done to display the Samsung keyboard.  
.
– or –  
Note: The Speech Recognition feature works best when you  
break your message down into smaller segments.  
Touch  
Input  
Settings and slide to  
to enable Voice  
.
Entering Text  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
54  
   
Section 4: Contacts and Accounts  
This section explains how to manage contacts and accounts.  
LDAP: Add an LDAP account to find entries in an LDAP directory  
server.  
Accounts  
Your device can synchronize with a variety of accounts. With  
synchronization, information on your device is updated with  
any information that changes in your accounts.  
Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync: Add your Exchange account to  
sync Contacts, Calendar, and Email.  
Server: Add a server to sync and access your data.  
Samsung account: Add your Samsung account. For more  
Setting Up Your Accounts  
Set up and manage your synchronized accounts with the  
Accounts and sync setting.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
ChatON: Add your ChatON account. For more information, refer to  
Apps  
Settings  
Accounts and sync.  
Dropbox: Add your Dropbox account. For more information, refer  
2. Touch  
Add account, then touch the account type.  
3. Follow the prompts to enter your account credentials to  
complete the set-up process.  
Email: Add an Email account to sync Contacts. For more  
4. The device communicates with account servers to set  
up your account. When complete, your account  
displays in the Manage accounts area of the Accounts  
and sync screen.  
Facebook: Add your Facebook account to sync Contacts.  
Google: Add your Google account to sync your Contacts, Calendar,  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Contacts  
Store contact information for your friends, family, and  
colleagues to quickly access information or to send a  
message.  
Tip: Touch the screen and swipe up or down to display  
additional fields or touch Next on the keyboard to move to  
the next field.  
To access Contacts:  
• Name: Enter a first name for the contact. Touch  
Name prefix First name Middle name Last name, and  
Name suffix  
• Phone: Enter a telephone number, then touch the  
tab to choose a label from Mobile Home Work  
Home Fax Pager Other Custom, or Callback  
• Email: Enter an email address, then touch the  
to choose a label from Home Work  
create a custom label.  
• Address: Enter an address, then touch the  
choose a label from Home Work Other, or Custom to create  
to enter a  
,
,
,
From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
Apps  
Apps  
.
.
Label  
Creating Contacts  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
,
,
,
Work Fax  
,
,
,
,
.
Contacts  
.
Label tab  
2. Touch Device or an account.  
,
,
Other, or Custom to  
3. Touch the Photo ID to set up a photo to identify the  
contact.  
Label tab to  
• Picture: Choose a photo from the Gallery.  
Take picture: Display the Camera and take a photo of the  
contact.  
,
,
a custom label.  
• Events: Touch  
to display an event label and field. Enter  
4. Touch contact fields to display the keyboard and enter  
information:  
the event date, then touch the  
from Birthday Anniversary  
custom event. Touch  
Label tab to choose a label  
,
,
Other, or Custom to create a  
to add additional events.  
Contacts and Accounts  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
• Groups: Touch this field to display the Select group screen. To  
assign the contact to one or more groups, touch the check box  
next to each group. When enabled, a check mark  
appears in the check box. For more information about Groups,  
Updating Contacts  
To update an existing contact:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Contacts.  
2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its  
5. Touch  
remove an unused field.  
6. Touch Add another field to add these additional fields:  
Phonetic name Organization IM Notes Nickname,  
Internet call, and Relationship  
Back to remove the keyboard.  
to add additional fields.Touch  
to  
information.  
3. Touch  
Edit.  
4. Continue entering contact information. For more  
,
,
,
,
Website  
,
.
Deleting Contacts  
To delete a contact:  
7. Touch  
8. When you finish entering information, touch  
Save.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its  
information, and then touch Delete. At the prompt,  
touch OK  
Apps  
– or –  
.
Touch  
Cancel  
OK to cancel and discard  
changes.  
.
Tip: Display a contact’s record and touch the Email field to  
send an email, touch the Address field to display the  
address on a map, or touch the Website field to link to the  
website.  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Contacts: Show all your contacts. Touch the Find contacts  
field and enter a keyword to list contacts that contain that  
keyword.  
Managing Photo IDs  
To remove or update a contact’s Photo ID:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
• Favorites: Show only your favorite, or starred, contacts. For  
Contacts  
.
2. Touch  
Edit  
.
3. From the Contacts list, touch  
Menu to display all or  
3. Touch the Photo ID, then touch Remove  
picture  
Contacts Display Options  
There are various ways to display your Contacts and general  
Contacts settings.  
,
Picture, or Take  
some of these options:  
• Delete contacts. Touch and check mark the box next to each  
contact you want to delete. Touch Delete and then touch OK  
.
.
• Merge with Samsung account: Merges the current contact  
with your Samsung account contacts.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
• Merge with Google: Merges the current contact with your  
Google account contacts.  
Contacts.  
2. Touch Groups  
,
Contacts, or Favorites, above the  
• Send email: Sends an email to the selected contact.  
• History: Displays information about the selected contact.  
• Join contact: Join a contact to one or more other contacts. For  
• Mark as default: If a contact has multiple email addresses, for  
example, touch the field that should be the default value.  
Contacts List, to view contacts various ways:  
• Groups: Displays the possible Groups, such as Not assigned,  
Co-workers, Family, Friends, and so on. The number of  
contacts in the group is displayed next to the group name.  
Touch a group name to show only contacts in that group. For  
Contacts and Accounts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
58  
   
• Share namecard via: Shares the selected namecard using  
Bluetooth, ChatON, Dropbox, Email, Gmail, or through Wi-Fi  
Direct.  
Contact sharing settings: Sets parameters for sending  
contact information:  
- Send all namecards: Allows you to transmit all of your  
current Contact entries at a single time. If the recipient device  
does not support this feature, some or all Contact entries might  
not be received.  
• Print namecard: Check mark the fields you want to print and  
then touch Print. You can only print on a Samsung printer.  
• Contacts to display: Select the contacts you want to display in  
this inbox (All contacts, Google, Device, or Customized list).  
• Import/Export: Use the USB cable to import your contacts  
from, or export your contacts to, a storage device, such as a  
- Send individual namecards: Allows you to transmit single  
contacts, one at a time. The recipient must accept each  
namecard as it is received. This method of transmission ensures  
all contacts are received.  
4. From the Groups list, select a group and then touch  
Menu to display these Group-specific options:  
• Search: Search the group for a contact.  
• Accounts: Displays the Accounts and sync screen so you can  
manage or synchronize this account.  
• Delete: Touch one or more groups and touch Delete  
.
• Settings: Configure contact settings:  
• Edit: Change the Group name or touch Add member to add or  
delete group members.  
Only contacts with phones: Touch to check the box to only  
display contacts that have phone numbers.  
• Add member: Add a new member to this group.  
• Remove member: Remove a selected member from this  
group.  
List by: List contacts by First name or Last name  
Display contacts by: Display contact names as First name or  
Last name first  
.
.
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Send email: To send an email to one or more members of the  
Joining Contacts  
group, touch and check mark the box next to each contact you  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
want to send to, or touch Select all, and touch  
Done  
.
Contacts.  
Touch Compose Gmail or Compose Email as the method for  
sending the email.  
2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its  
information.  
• Change order: Changes the order of how the groups display.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Join contact.  
4. Touch the contact you want to Join.  
The joined contact’s information is displayed with the  
original contact’s information.  
Linked Contacts  
Your device can synchronize with multiple accounts,  
including Google, Corporate Exchange, and other email  
providers. When you synchronize contacts from these  
accounts with your device, you may have multiple contacts  
for one person.  
5. Repeat Step 3 and 4 to join other contacts.  
Separating Contacts  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Linking, or joining, imported contact records allows you to  
see all the contact’s numbers and addresses together in one  
contact entry. Linking also helps you keep your contacts  
updated, because any changes that your contacts make to  
their information in the respective accounts is automatically  
updated the next time you synchronize with the account.  
Contacts  
.
2. Touch a contact in the Contacts list to view its  
information.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Separate contact.  
A list of Joined contacts displays.  
4. Touch  
OK to separate a joined contact.  
The contact is removed from the list.  
Contacts and Accounts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
60  
       
• Dropbox: To send the contact information to a Dropbox  
Sharing Contact Information  
You can send a contact’s information by way of Bluetooth to  
other Bluetooth devices or in an Email or Gmail as an  
attachment.  
Note: Not all Bluetooth devices accept contacts and not all  
devices support transfers of multiple contacts. Check  
the target device’s documentation.  
• Wi-Fi Direct: To send Contacts entries directly to an external  
device through a Wi-Fi connection.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
4. Follow the prompts to send the contact information.  
Contacts  
.
Importing and Exporting Contacts  
2. Touch  
Menu  
Share namecard via.  
To back up and restore your contacts information, you can  
export your contacts list to a storage device, such as a PC, or  
import your contacts list (previously exported) from a storage  
device.  
Tip: Set up a contact record for yourself to share your  
information with others.  
1. Use the USB cable to connect your device to the  
storage device.  
3. At the prompt, choose a sending method. Options are:  
2. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Contacts  
.
• ChatON: To send the contact information to your ChatON  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Import/Export.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. Touch Import from USB storage  
,
Export to USB storage,  
Tip: Contacts can belong to more than one group. Just touch  
Import from SD card Export to SD card, or Send  
,
the contact’s Groups field and touch each group.  
namecard via, then follow the prompts to complete the  
operation.  
Once you create a new group, the Contacts List can be set to  
display only the contacts in that group. For more information,  
Groups  
Assign contacts to Groups to make searching for contacts  
faster or to quickly send messages to group members.  
Renaming a Group  
To rename a group that you created:  
Creating a New Group  
Create a new group when you add or edit a contact.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
Apps  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
2. Touch Groups above the Contacts List.  
3. Touch  
Apps  
2. Touch Groups and then touch the group you want to  
.
rename.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Edit.  
.
4. Touch the Group name field and use the keyboard to  
enter a new Group name.  
4. Touch the Group name field and use the keyboard to  
enter a new Group name.  
5. Touch Add member to add a member to the group. For  
5. Touch Add member to add a member to the group. For  
6. Touch  
to save the new group name.  
6. Touch  
to save the new group name.  
Contacts and Accounts  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
3. Touch  
Menu  
Add member.  
Deleting Groups  
To delete a group that you created:  
The contacts that can be added display.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to add.  
Contacts.  
5. Touch  
Done to add the contacts to the group.  
2. Touch Groups and then touch any group you want to  
Removing Group Members  
To remove contacts from a group:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
delete.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Delete.  
Apps  
The groups that can be deleted display.  
Contacts.  
4. Touch Select all or the name of each group to delete.  
2. Touch Groups and then touch the group from which you  
5. Touch  
Delete to delete the groups. Choose from  
want to remove members.  
Group only or Group and group members.  
3. Touch  
4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to remove.  
5. Touch Done to remove the contacts.  
Menu  
Remove member.  
Adding Group Members  
To add a contact to a group, just Edit a contact’s Group field.  
Contacts are removed from the group and the group  
name is removed from each contact’s Group field.  
To add multiple contacts to a group:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
Apps  
.
2. Touch Groups and then touch the group to which you  
want to add members.  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Favorites  
Mark contact records with a  
favorites.  
Note: Touch Groups above the Contacts List and then touch  
Starred in Android to list the Favorites that are being  
saved on your Google account.  
gold star to identify them as  
Adding Favorites  
To add a contact to the Favorites list:  
Removing Favorites  
To remove one or more contacts from your favorites list:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
2. Touch Favorites above the Contacts List.  
3. Touch Menu Remove from favorites  
4. Touch Select all or the name of each contact to remove.  
5. Touch Done to remove the contacts.  
To remove one contact from your favorites list:  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
Contacts  
2. Touch a contact to display it.  
Apps  
Contacts  
.
.
2. Touch a contact to display it.  
3. Touch the  
Star next to the contact name so that it  
.
.
turns gold  
Tip: You do not have to edit the contact to change the Starred  
status.  
Accessing Favorites  
To view your favorites list:  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
Apps  
3. Touch the  
Star next to the contact’s name so that it  
.
turns gray  
to remove it from the Favorites list.  
2. Touch Favorites above the Contacts List.  
Only your starred contacts display.  
Contacts and Accounts  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
64  
   
Section 5: Messaging  
This section describes how to send and receive messages  
and other features associated with messaging.  
Gmail  
Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based  
email.  
Types of Messages  
Your device supports these types of messages:  
Tip: To set up your Google account on your device, use  
Accounts and sync settings. For more information, refer to  
Gmail: Send and receive Gmail from your Google account.  
Email: Send and receive email from your email accounts,  
including Corporate Exchange mail.  
Google Talk: Chat with other Google Talk users.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
Google Messenger Use Google Messenger to bring groups of  
:
Setting Up Your Gmail Account  
If you did not set up a Google account during the initial  
configuration, the first time you launch Gmail, your device  
prompts you to set up your Google account.  
friends together into a simple group conversation.  
ChatON: Use ChatON to send and receive instant messages from  
any device that has a mobile phone number.  
Note: Your Wi-Fi-only device does NOT support voice calling  
and messaging services. Please disregard any “dial”  
and “message” related menus because some Gmail  
options are identically set in all Android devices.  
Note: You can use more than one Google account on your  
device. To add another account, touch  
Settings ADD ACCOUNT  
Menu  
.
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
Refreshing Your Gmail Account  
Refresh your account to update your device from the Gmail  
The Add a Google Account screen displays.  
servers.  
2. Touch Existing to sign in to an existing account.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail  
Gmail  
.
.
At the Sign in screen, use the on-screen keyboard to enter  
your Google Email name and Password, then touch Sign in  
2. Touch Refresh in the Application Bar.  
.
Managing Your Gmail Account  
Use menu options to manage your Gmail account.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu for these options:  
• Manage labels: Determine settings for each label.  
– or –  
Touch New to create a new account.  
Apps  
At the Your name screen, enter your first and last name, and  
touch Next  
.
At the Create email address follow the prompts to create a  
new account.  
The Backup and restore screen displays.  
• Help: Learn about using Gmail.  
3. Read the backup and restore information, touch the  
• Send Feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.  
option to enable or disable it, and then touch Next  
.
4. The device communicates with the Google server to set  
up your account and synchronize your email. When  
complete, your Gmail displays in the Inbox.  
Messaging  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Touch  
• Add star  
Menu for these options:  
Remove star: Mark (or unmark) conversations with  
Managing Your Gmail Conversations  
In addition to managing your Gmail account, there are  
options for changing the status of one or more Gmail  
conversations in an account.  
/
a yellow star. Starred conversations are listed in the Starred  
folder. Touch  
DONE to remove check marks.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
• Mark important  
/
Mark not important: Change the  
2. Touch the gray box to the left of one or more  
importance indicator  
. Yellow indicates important.  
conversations and then choose one of the following  
options:  
• Mute: New messages added to muted conversations bypass  
your inbox so that the conversation stays archived in the All  
Mail folder.  
• Archive  
conversations are assigned to the All Mail folder.  
• Delete : Delete the conversations. Deleted conversations  
are moved to the Trash folder.  
• Change labels : Relocate the conversations to the Inbox  
Personal Receipts Travel, or Work folder and then touch OK  
• Mark as Read Mark as Unread : Mark the  
conversations as read or unread. Once a conversation is  
: Archive the conversations. Archived  
• Report spam: Report the conversations as spam, which are  
emails that violate the Gmail Program Policies and/or Terms of  
Use.  
,
• Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to  
• Help: Learn about using Gmail.  
,
,
.
/
• Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.  
marked as read, it has a gray background. Touch  
to remove the check marks.  
DONE  
Tip: To move a conversation to another folder, touch and drag  
it to the folder tab.  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Touch SEND to send this message.  
Composing and Sending Gmail  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Apps  
Gmail.  
2. Touch  
Compose  
.
Touch SAVE DRAFT to save a draft of this message.  
3. Touch the To field to enter recipients. As you enter  
Gmail Account Settings  
names or email addresses, matching contacts display.  
Touch a contact to add it to the field.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
2. Touch  
Menu  
Settings for settings:  
4. Touch the Subject field to enter a subject.  
5. Touch Compose email to enter the text of your email.  
6. While composing a message, the following options are  
displayed:  
General settings  
• Confirm before deleting: Have your device prompt you to  
confirm Delete actions.  
• Confirm before archiving: Have your device prompt you to  
confirm archiving actions.  
• + CC/BCC: Create Cc (copy) and Bcc (blind copy) fields in the  
message. After creating the fields, touch to enter recipients.  
• Confirm before sending: Have your device prompt you to  
confirm Send actions.  
Attach: Launch Gallery to select a photo to add to the  
message.  
7. Touch  
• Auto-advance: Choose a screen to show after you delete or  
archive a conversation.  
Menu for the following options:  
• Help: Learn about using Gmail.  
• Message text size: Set the size of text in message displays.  
• Clear search history: Remove previous searches you  
performed.  
• Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.  
Messaging  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Ask to show pictures: Restores the default setting (do not  
show pictures automatically) for all the people who send you  
email, including those whose Show pictures setting you may  
have changed when reading messages from them.  
(Gmail account settings)  
• Signature: Create a text signature to add to outgoing  
messages.  
• Gmail sync is ON/OFF: Indicates whether you have Gmail  
synchronization turned on for this account in the Account and  
sync settings. Touch to open those settings.  
• Days of mail to sync: Set the number days to sync email for  
this Gmail account.  
Each account has independent settings:  
• Priority Inbox: This setting is only available if you have  
configured Gmail on the web to show Priority Inbox. If available,  
you can set Priority Inbox as the conversation list to open when  
you have new mail, rather than Inbox.  
• Manage labels: Choose which labels are synchronized.  
• Download attachments: Enable or disable auto-download of  
files attached to recent messages when connected through  
Wi-Fi.  
• Email notifications: When enabled, notifications for new email  
appear in the Status Bar.  
About Gmail  
Displays information about the Gmail (Version, copyright  
information, Send feedback, Report a problem, Open source  
licenses).  
• Ringtone & vibrate: If Email notifications is enabled, touch this  
field to set the following options:  
Sync messages: Sync options are: None, Last 30 days, or All.  
Email notifications: When enabled, notifications for new email  
appear in the Status Bar.  
Experiments  
• Enable full text search: Enable indexing message content to  
allow a local search.  
Ringtone: Choose a ringtone for new email notifications or use  
the default ringtone and then touch OK  
.
• Enable drag and drop contact chip: Enables you to drag and  
drop a contact chip between To, CC, and BCC.  
Notify once: When enabled, a notification appears in the Status  
Bar for new email, not for every new message.  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Peak schedule: Set how often to check for new email sent to  
this account during peak times. Options are: Push (Automatic),  
Manual, every 5 or 15 minutes, or every 1, 4, or 12 hours.  
• Off-peak schedule: Set how often to check for new email sent  
to this account during off-peak times. Options are: Push  
(Automatic), Manual, every 5 or 15 minutes, or every 1, 4, or  
12 hours.  
Email  
Use Email to view and manage all your email accounts in one  
application.  
Configuring Email Accounts  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Email  
.
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Email.  
• Period to sync Email: For Exchange ActiveSync accounts, set  
whether to store All, 1 or 3 days, 1 or 2 weeks, or 1 month of  
email on the tablet.  
2. At the Set up email screen, enter an Email address and  
Password, then touch Next  
.
3. Your account’s incoming server settings are different  
depending on the kind of email service for the account.  
If you are asked What type of account?, touch the type  
• Emails retrieval size: Set the maximum email retrieval size.  
Options are: Headers only, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, or100 KB,  
or All.  
of account: POP3 account  
,
IMAP account, or Microsoft  
• Period to sync Calendar: Set how much of the calendar for  
this account to sync with your tablet. Options are: 2 weeks, 1,  
3, or 6 months, or All calendar.  
Exchange ActiveSync  
.
The Server settings screen displays. Enter the required  
settings and touch Next. For more information, refer to  
• Send email from this account by default: When enabled,  
email from your device is automatically sent from this account.  
• Notify me when email arrives: When enabled, you receive  
notifications when you receive new email sent to this account.  
4. Review the Account options screen. Available options  
vary, depending on the provider:  
Messaging  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Sync email: When enabled, email from your account is  
synchronized with your device’s email.  
7. Touch Done.  
The device communicates with the appropriate server  
to set up your account and synchronize your email.  
When complete, your email appears in the Inbox for the  
account.  
• Sync Contacts: When enabled, contacts from your account  
are synchronized with your device’s Contacts.  
• Sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your account are  
synchronized with your device’s Calendar.  
Note: To configure email account settings at any time, use  
• Sync task: When enabled, tasks from your account are  
synchronized with your device’s Calendar.  
Menu  
Settings. Touch the account to display  
Account settings.  
• Automatically download attachments when connected to  
Wi-Fi: Enable or disable auto-download of files attached to  
recent messages when connected through Wi-Fi.  
5. Touch Next to go to the next screen ortouch Previous to  
go to the Apps screen.  
Multiscreen  
Touch  
Multiscreen to split and share the screen  
Adding Additional Email Accounts  
To add additional email accounts:  
Note: For Exchange ActiveSync accounts, the Activate device  
administrator? screen may appear. Read the information  
and touch Activate to continue.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu Settings  
3. Enter the Email address Password, and so on.  
Email  
.
Add account  
.
6. Enter an account name for the email account just  
added, which is displayed on the email screen, and  
enter Your name, if required.  
,
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Mark as Read  
conversations as read or unread. Once a conversation is  
marked as read, it has a gray background.  
/
Mark as Unread  
: Mark the  
Managing Your Email Accounts  
You can view email you receive for all accounts in the  
Combined view screen or you can view email accounts  
individually.  
• Move to  
:
Relocate the conversations to another folder in  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch the drop-down menu at the top left of the  
screen to select:  
• Combined view: View all email in a combined inbox.  
Account Name>: View email for the account.  
Email.  
the current email account or in a folder within another email  
account.  
• Delete  
3. Touch  
: Delete the conversations.  
Menu for these options:  
<
• Sort by: Choose a method for listing your email conversations.  
• View mode: Choose how to view your email conversations.  
Choices are: Standard view and Conversations view.  
• Create folder: Create a new main folder or touch an existing  
folder to create a sub-folder.  
Managing Your Email Conversations  
In addition to managing your Email account, there are  
options for changing the status of one or more Email  
conversations in an account.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Email.  
Note: This option is not available for all email accounts.  
• Settings: Display the settings for this email account. For more  
2. Touch the box to the left of one or more conversations  
and then choose one of the following options:  
• Star  
: Mark the conversations with a gold star and list  
• Delete all: Delete all items for this email account.  
• New meeting invitation: Use S Planner to add an event or add  
them in the Starred folder. Touch  
to make the changes.  
– or –  
Flag  
: Touch Clear to clear all flags and check marks, touch  
Complete to mark all conversations with a blue check mark, or  
touch Set to set all flags. Set flags are gold.  
Messaging  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Composing and Sending Email  
Tracking options: Touch Read receipt or Delivery  
receipt and then touch OK to set the tracking  
options for this email.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Email.  
2. Touch an account, if you have more than one account  
set up, then touch Compose  
3. Enter the recipient’s email address in the To field.  
.
Security options: Set the emailsecurity options.  
Options are: Encrypt and Sign.  
If you are sending the email message to several recipients,  
separate the email addresses with a comma. You can add as  
many message recipients as you want.  
S Note: Select one or more S Note filesto attach  
or insert into your email.  
Attach: Choose an attachment to add to the  
messagefrom thelistedapps, such as My Files,  
Images, Audio, Video, and so on.  
Touch  
to add a contact to the field.  
Touch +Cc/Bcc to add additional carbon copy recipients.  
Use the Cc field to carbon copy additional recipients.  
Undo: Erase the previous input.  
Use the Bcc field to blind copy additional recipients.  
Touch +Me to add yourself as a recipient.  
Redo: Restore the previously erased input.  
4. Touch the Subject field to enter a subject.  
5. Touch the body of the email to enter the text of your  
email.  
Insert:Chooseanitemtoinsertintothemessage  
from the listed apps, such as Picture, Memo,  
Contacts, and so on.  
6. While composing a message, the following options  
may be displayed:  
Insert quick response: Insert text that you  
frequently use in emails. For more information,  
Priority:Set the emailpriority. Optionsare:High,  
Normal, or Low.  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Fontsize:Chooseatext fontsizeof9, 10,12, 14,  
16, 20, 24, 28, or 36 points.  
Note: Available settings may depend on the email account and  
include setting how much email to synchronize, creating  
signatures for email you send, and other handling  
options.  
Bold:Boldthe followingtext. Touchagaintoturn  
off bold.  
Italics: This action italicizes the subsequent  
entered text.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Email.  
2. Touch Menu Settings, then touch General  
Font color: Set the color of the text font. The bar  
changes to the selected color.  
Preferences. The following options display:  
• Display after deleting message: Set the screen to show after  
deleting a message. Choices are: Next message, Previous  
message, or Message list.  
Background color: Set the color of the  
background of the email.  
• Message preview line: Choose a message preview line  
amount. Options are: None or 1, 2, or 3 lines.  
• Email title: Set whether the Subject or Sender of the email is  
shown as the title.  
7. Touch  
Save to save the email to the Drafts folder,  
Send to send the email, or  
email.  
Delete to delete the  
Account Settings  
• Confirm deletions: Touch the box to enable or disable this  
Account settings lets you configure handling of email on your  
device.  
option. A check mark  
confirmed.  
indicates that deletions must be  
• Quick responses: Edit text that you frequently use in emails.  
Touch an email account to display the following  
settings:  
Messaging  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Common settings  
• Auto download attachments: Enable or disable  
auto-download of files attached to recent messages when  
connected through Wi-Fi.  
• Account name: Enter a name to identify this account.  
Your name: Enter a name to be used on emails.  
• Signature: Enter a signature to add to email from this account.  
• Default account: When enabled, email from your device is  
automatically sent from this account.  
• Size to retrieve emails: Set the maximum email retrieval size.  
Options are: Headers only, 2, 50, or 100 KB, All, or All including  
attachments.  
Exchange ActiveSync settings  
• Always Cc/Bcc myself: Lets you manage whether your email  
address is included in the Cc or Bcc lines.  
• Period to sync Email: Set whether to store All, 1 or 3 days, 1  
or 2 weeks, or 1 month of email on the tablet.  
• Empty server trash: If available, indicates whether to delete  
the contents in the server trash.  
• Forward with files: Touch the check box to include any file  
attachments when you forward an email.  
• Recent messages: Limit the number of recent messages that  
are displayed on your device. Options are: 25, 50, 75, 100,  
200, or Total.  
• Sync schedule: Set up your peak and off-peak schedule  
controls, which determines when your tablet checks the email  
service for new email.  
• Show images: Display images in an email.  
Data usage  
• Out of office settings: Lets you set how email is handled for a  
defined period of time, while you are unable to check your  
email.  
• Sync email: Touch the box to enable or disable this option. A  
check mark  
indicates email sync is enabled.  
• Size to retrieve emails: Set the maximum email retrieval size.  
Options are: Headers only, 0.5, 1, 2, 5,10, 20, 50, or 100 KB,  
or All.  
• Email check frequency: Set how often to check for new email  
sent to this account during. Options are: Never, every 5, 10, 15,  
or 30 minutes, every hour, every 4 hours, or once a day.  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Period to sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your  
account are synchronized with your device’s Calendar.  
• Security options: Set various security options for the account.  
• In case of Sync Conflict: Set whether to update the server or  
your tablet if there is a conflict of information between them.  
• Auto resend times: Set the number of auto send times.  
Options are: No limit or 1, 3, 5, or 10 times.  
• Outgoing settings: Configure outgoing server settings. For  
more information, refer to “Outgoing Server Settings” on  
page 77.  
• Sync email: When enabled, email from your account is  
synchronized with your device’s email.  
• Sync Contacts: When enabled, contacts from your account  
are synchronized with your device’s Contacts.  
• Sync Calendar: When enabled, events from your account are  
synchronized with your device’s Calendar.  
Notification settings  
• Email notifications: When enabled, the New Email icon  
appears in the Status Bar when a new email arrives.  
• Select ringtone: Choose a ringtone for email notifications for  
this account.  
• Sync task: When enabled, tasks from your account are  
synchronized with your device’s tasks.  
Incoming Server Settings  
Your account’s exchange or incoming server settings are  
different, depending on the kind of email service for the  
account: POP3, IMAP, or Exchange ActiveSync.  
• Vibrate: When enabled, email notifications for this accounts  
are accompanied by vibration.  
Server settings  
Domain\ user name: If your Exchange ActiveSync server requires  
that you specify a domain, enter it before the backslash.  
Otherwise, just enter your username (the part before  
@emailprovider.com in your email address) after the backslash.  
The backslash is optional when only entering your username. The  
Email app enters the correct syntax for domains and usernames  
when communicating with the server.  
• Exchange server settings: Configure incoming server  
settings.  
– or –  
Incoming settings: Configure incoming server settings. For more  
Messaging  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Password: The password for your email account, which should be  
filled in.  
SMTP server: The fully resolved domain name of your email  
service provider’s SMTP server, for example,  
smtp.emprovider.com.  
Exchange server / IMAP server: The fully resolved domain name  
of your email service provider’s server, for example,  
mail.emailprovider.com.  
Security type: Select the security type required by your email  
service provider. Select the SLL (Accept all certificates) option  
for your security type to accept a server certificate from your  
SMTP server that is self-signed, out of date, or in some other way  
not accepted by the Email application.  
Use secure connection (SSL) / Security type: Check this option if  
your server requires you to connect to the server securely, or if  
you prefer to connect securely.  
Port: Set the Security type first to enter the typical server port  
number in this field automatically. Or enter a different port  
number if your email service provider requires it.  
Use client certificate: Use a client certificate for messaging  
security.  
Port: Set the Security type first to enter the typical server port  
number in this field automatically. Or enter a different port  
number if your email service provider requires it.  
IMAP path prefix: Enter an IMAP path prefix, if required.  
Require sign-in: Check this option to enter a username and  
password for your SMTP server, if your email service provider  
requires that you enter them to send email.  
User name: Your username on the SMTP server (this may not be  
the same as your username on the POP3 or IMAP server for  
incoming mail). Visible only if Require sign-in is checked.  
Password: Your password on the SMTP server (this may not be the  
same as your username on the POP3 or IMAP server for incoming mail).  
Visible only if Require sign-in is checked.  
Outgoing Server Settings  
If you use an IMAP or POP3 account for receiving email, you  
typically use an SMTP server to send email from that  
account. Exchange ActiveSync accounts do not have  
separate outgoing server settings.  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Google Talk  
Note: If you have already set up your Google account, you are  
Talk is Google’s instant messaging and audio and video chat  
service. You can use it to communicate, in real time, with  
other people who also use Google Talk on another Android  
tablet or phone or on a computer.  
automatically logged in. Just touch the account.  
Once sign in is complete, the Talk main screen  
displays.  
Tip: Talk requires that you have a Google account. To set up  
your Google account on your device use Accounts and  
Invite a Friend to Chat  
You can invite anyone with a Google Account to become your  
friend in Google Talk, so you can chat with each other and  
view each other’s online status.  
1. While viewing your Friends list, touch  
Add friend.  
Open Talk and Sign In  
2. Enter your friend’s address and touch DONE  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Talk.  
Your friend’s address in Talk is a Gmail or other email  
address that is configured to connect to Google Talk.  
If you are not signed in to a Google account, the Add a  
Google Account screen displays.  
If your friend accepts your invitation, they are added to  
your Friends list in Talk and you can share each others  
status in Talk and other applications.  
2. Touch Existing, if you already have a Google account,  
or New to create a Google account.  
Messaging  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
View and Accept an Invitation to Become a  
Friend  
Options While Chatting  
There are several options that are available while you are  
chatting.  
When a contact invites you to become a friend in Google Talk,  
you receive a  
notification in the System Bar and the  
1. Touch  
to search your chats for a word,  
to  
invitation displays in your Friends list.  
invite another friend to chat,  
to invite this friend to  
1. Touch the invitation.  
video chat, or  
2. Touch  
to invite this friend to voice chat.  
2. Touch Accept, if you want to accept the invitation and  
chat, Decline, if you do not want to chat with and share  
your Google Talk status with the sender right now, or  
Block, if you do not want to receive any more  
invitations from that person.  
Menu to display the following options,  
which are available while chatting. For more  
• End chat: End this chat session.  
If you touch Accept, the friend is added to your Friends  
list in Talk and you can share your status in Talk and  
other applications.  
• Go off the record/Stop chatting off the record: Set whether  
you want to stop saving your chat to the chat history.  
• Friend info: Display information about the friend with which  
you are chatting. The following options are also displayed:  
BLOCK: Keeps this person from sending you messages and  
removes the person from your Friends list.  
REMOVE: Remove the friend as if you never accepted their  
invitation. However, the friend is not blocked.  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Add to chat: Choose another friend to invite to this  
conversation.  
• Settings: Offers various settings for Google talk. For more  
• Help: Displays additional help information.  
• Clear chat history: Remove the history of this chat from your  
device.  
• Send feedback: Fill out a Google feedback form.  
3. Touch a Friend’s entry to display the Chat entries for  
that Friend.  
Note: If you touch the REMOVE option, touch  
Add friend  
Send chat invitation to, to make the Friend visible again.  
Google Talk Settings  
Use Google Talk Settings to configure your Talk account. If  
you have more than one account, each maintains its own  
Talk settings.  
Additional Talk Options  
1. While viewing your Friends list, touch  
to search  
your Talk messages. Use the on-screen keyboard to  
enter a search term. Touch  
search your Talk messages.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu Settings, then touch an account for  
options:  
GENERAL  
Apps  
Talk.  
on the keyboard to  
2. Touch  
• Display options: To set the way your friends list is sorted,  
touch Availability Name, or Recency  
Menu to display the following options:  
,
.
• Mobile indicator: Check and your friends see an outline of an  
android next to your name in their Friends list when you are  
signed into Google Talk on a tablet or phone.  
• End all chats: End all chats in which you are engaged.  
• Sign out: Sign out of Google Talk and display the Talk main  
screen.  
Messaging  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Away when screen off: Check to change your Talk status to  
Away when your screen turns off. When unchecked, your  
status is not changed.  
• Video chat ringtone: Set a ringtone to sound, or silent, when  
you receive an invitation to a video chat.  
• Default video effect: Set the video image stabilization.  
ACCOUNT  
• Invitation notifications: Show notification when a friend  
invitation arrives.  
• Blocked friends: Displays a list of friends you have blocked.  
Touch a blocked friend and then touch OK to unblock the  
friend.  
CHAT NOTIFICATIONS  
• IM notifications: Set whether to open a dialog, display a  
notification in the System Bar, or neither, when you receive a  
text chat.  
• Clear search history: Erases your search history. No previous  
searches are shown until you search for new words.  
• Manage account: Opens the Accounts and sync settings. For  
• Notification ringtone: Set a ringtone to sound, or silent, when  
you receive a text chat.  
• Vibrate: Set how vibrate functions. Choices are: Always, Only  
when silent, or Never.  
ABOUT  
VOICE & VIDEO CHAT  
Terms & privacy: Displays the Google Talk terms of use and  
• Video chat notifications: Set whether to open a dialog or  
display a notification in the System Bar when you are invited to  
a video chat.  
privacy policies.  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Messenger  
ChatON  
With Google Messenger, you can bring groups of friends  
together into a simple group conversation, putting everyone  
on the same page. When you get a new conversation in  
Messenger, Google+ sends an update to your device.  
A smart-messaging app that gives you a host of innovative  
ways to stay connected with all your friends and family,  
regardless of their device or platform. Use ChatON to send  
and receive instant messages from any device that has a  
mobile phone number.  
To get started, touch the Messenger icon on the home screen  
of the Google+ app or use the Messenger icon on your  
Applications screen.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
ChatON.  
If you are launching this application for the first time,  
follow the on-screen instructions to complete the  
account setup.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Messenger  
The Messenger screen displays.  
Apps  
.
2. Enter and send your message.  
2. Touch Learn more in the center of the screen and then  
touch a topic to learn more about using Google  
Messenger.  
Messaging  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Section 6: Internet and Social Networking  
This section describes the various Internet and social  
networking applications available on your device such as  
Google+, Internet, Latitude, Maps, Navigation, Places,  
Google Play™ Books, Google and Voice Search, and  
YouTube.  
To get started:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Google+  
The Google+ home screen displays.  
2. Touch Menu Help and then touch a topic to  
learn more about using Google+.  
Apps  
.
Google+  
Share updates and see what is going on around you with  
Google+ for mobile.  
Internet  
Your device is equipped with a full HTML Browser that allows  
you to access the Internet.  
Share your thoughts and location.  
Instantly upload your photos and videos as you take them.  
Get updates from your circles in the stream.  
Check in to a place.  
Tip: Internet displays by default as a Primary shortcut on the  
Home screen.  
Make plans on-the-go with group messaging.  
View posts from people around you.  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Internet.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Internet.  
The Most visited screen displays.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Touching and Dragging  
Touch and drag your finger on the screen to navigate pages and  
to reposition pages within the screen.  
Entering Text in a Field  
While browsing, touch a text field to display the virtual QWERTY  
keyboard to enter text.  
Zoom  
Tap the screen twice to zoom in or out.  
Use two fingers, such as your index finger  
and thumb, to zoom out by making an  
inward pinch motion on the screen. To zoom  
in, make an outward motion by sweeping your fingers out.  
Navigating the Internet  
The following options are available for Internet navigation.  
Tip: For convenient browsing, you can rotate the device to  
Command Keys  
landscape mode.  
Touch  
Back or  
to return to the previous page.  
Touch and hold  
Back display browser History. For more  
Selecting Items On a Page  
While browsing, use gestures and menus to navigate:  
Touch an item to select it.  
Touch  
Touch  
Forward to go forward to a recent page.  
Touch a hyperlink to follow the link.  
Refresh to reload the current page.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
84  
Touch and hold on a hyperlink for these options:  
3. To switch to another open window, touch its tab at the  
top of the screen.  
Open: Open the linked page.  
Open in new window: Open a new window to display the linked  
page.  
4. To delete an open window, touch the tab at the top of  
the screen, and then touch  
Entering a URL  
Access a website quickly by entering the URL.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Internet  
.
Save link: Save the linked page to Download history.  
Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard.  
Select text: Copy the link text to the clipboard.  
.
Touch and hold an image for the additional options:  
Save image: Download an image. View downloaded images in  
Gallery.  
2. Touch the URL field at the top of the screen, then enter  
the URL using the virtual QWERTY keyboard.  
Copy image: Copy an image to the clipboard.  
View image: View the image source.  
Set as wallpaper: Use the image as your home screen  
wallpaper.  
As you enter characters, potential matches display.  
Note: Use the  
necessary.  
Delete key to clear the URL field, if  
Using Internet Windows  
You can have multiple windows open at one time and easily  
3. Touch a match to complete the URL.  
– or –  
switch between windows.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
2. To open a new window, touch  
screen.  
Internet  
.
Continue entering characters and touch the Go key to  
load the page.  
at the top of the  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Copying and Pasting a Hyperlink or URL  
Copying Fields or Text  
Copy information from a webpage to the clipboard for  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Internet.  
pasting, searching, or sharing.  
2. Browse to a webpage.  
Selecting, Copying, and Pasting Text  
3. Touch and hold on the link or URL, then touch Copy link  
URL on the pop-up menu.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Internet.  
2. Browse to a webpage.  
4. To paste the copied link or URL, navigate to the desired  
field (or to another application), then touch and hold in  
a text field and touch Paste on the pop-up menu.  
3. On the webpage, touch and hold on the text until you  
see the text you want highlighted, then stop touching  
the screen.  
Using Bookmarks  
While browsing, bookmark a site to quickly access it later.  
The text is highlighted.  
4. Touch and drag the  
tabs to the left or right to  
Creating a bookmark  
select more or less text.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Internet  
.
5. Touch Copy at the top of the screen to copy the  
selected text or touch Done to stop.  
2. Browse to a website, then touch  
Add bookmark.  
The Add bookmark options list displays. Confirm the  
6. To paste the copied text, navigate to the desired field  
(or to another application), then touch and hold in a text  
field and touch Paste in the pop-up.  
Name and URL Address for the bookmark.  
3. In the Account field, touch the drop-down menu, and  
touch Local or an account.  
4. Touch OK to save the bookmark.  
A gold star  
displays on the Bookmarked page.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
86  
   
Accessing Bookmarks and History  
Launch a bookmarked page or reload recent pages.  
4. On the History tab, touch Today  
,
Yesterday, Last month,  
Older, or Most visited to use these options:  
Touch a page to reload it.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Bookmarks History, and Saved pages  
3. On the Bookmarks tab, use these options:  
Internet.  
Touch the  
star  
next to a page to bookmark it. Touch a gold  
next to a page to remove the bookmark.  
,
.
Touch and hold on a page for these options:  
Touch a bookmark to load the page.  
Open: Open the webpage.  
Touch and hold on a bookmark for these options:  
Open in new tab: Launch the webpage in a new window.  
Open: Open the bookmarked page.  
Add bookmark/Remove from Bookmarks: Bookmark the  
page or remove the bookmark for this page.  
Open in new tab: Open the linked page in a new window.  
Edit bookmark: Make changes to the bookmark description.  
Add shortcut to home: Create a bookmark on the Home  
screen.  
Share link: Use Bluetooth, ChatON, Dropbox, Email, Gmail,  
Google+, S Note, or Wi-Fi Direct to send the link.  
Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard.  
Remove from history: Remove the record of this page.  
Set as homepage: Assign the bookmarked link as the home  
page.  
Share link: Use Bluetooth, ChatON, Dropbox, Email, Gmail,  
Google+, S Note, or Wi-Fi Direct to send the link.  
Copy link URL: Save the link’s URL to the clipboard.  
Delete bookmark: Remove the bookmark.  
Set as homepage: Assign the bookmarked link as the home  
page.  
5. On the Saved pages tab, use these options:  
Touch a page to reload it.  
Touch and hold on a page and then touch Remove from saved  
pages to remove the page from Saved pages.  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Save for offline reading: Saves the webpage so you can read it  
later even when offline.  
Multiscreen  
To split the browser screen and share the display with other  
apps, touch  
Downloads: View and manage recent downloads.  
Print: Print the current screen or page to a Samsung printer.  
Settings: Configure web settings. For more information, refer to  
Internet Menu  
While viewing a webpage, touch  
Menu for the following  
options:  
Internet Settings  
Use the browser settings to customize the browser.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
New tab: Open the webpage in a new window, under a new tab.  
New incognito tab: Open the webpage in a new window, under a  
new tab, and the pages you view in the new window will not  
appear in your browser history or search history. See the on-  
Internet  
Menu  
.
2. While viewing a webpage, touch  
Settings.  
Customize Internet by using the following options:  
screen explanation of going incognito  
.
General  
Add shortcut to home: Add the URL for this webpage as a  
shortcut on the first home screen.  
• Set home page: View and set the default first page that  
displays when you launch Internet.  
Share page: Use Bluetooth, ChatON, Dropbox, Email, Gmail,  
Google+, S Note, or Wi-Fi Direct to send the webpage URL.  
Find on page: Search for content on the current page.  
Desktop view: Your browser displays a website in a modified  
format that makes it easier to read. Desktop view displays a  
website the same way it would appear on a PC.  
• Form auto-fill: Enable or disable form auto-fill to complete  
Internet forms with a single click.  
• Auto-fill text: If Form auto-fill is enabled, enter text for Web  
form auto fill.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
88  
   
Privacy and security  
• Enable notifications: Set web notifications access information  
as Always on, On demand, or Off.  
• Clear notifications: Remove web notification access  
information.  
• Clear cache: Delete content and databases stored on the  
device.  
• Clear history: Delete the list of previously-visited pages.  
• Show security warnings: When enabled, the browser warns  
you if there is a problem with a site’s security.  
Accessibility  
• Force zoom: Override the website's request to control zoom.  
Text size: Use the Preview field and the following controls to  
configure text size:  
• Accept cookies: When enabled, allows the browser to save  
and read cookie information used by webpages.  
• Clear all cookie data: Delete cookie information saved to the  
device.  
Scale text up and down: Scale the text size up or down using  
a slider bar.  
• Remember form data: When enabled, stores information you  
enter into forms to make future forms easier.  
Zoom amount on double tap: Set how much to zoom when  
you double-tap the screen, from 75 to 125 percent.  
Minimum font size: Set the minimum font size, which can  
range from 1 point to 24 points.  
• Clear form data: Deletes saved form information.  
• Enable location: When enabled, sites you visit can request  
access to your location.  
• Inverted screen rendering: Use the Preview screen and the  
following controls to configure inverted screen rendering:  
• Clear location access: Clear location access for all websites.  
• Remember passwords: When enabled, saves user names  
and passwords for sites you visit, to make future visits easier.  
• Clear passwords: Clear all saved user names and passwords.  
Inverted rendering: Enable the display of websites with  
inverted colors – black becomes white and vice versa.  
Contrast: If Inverted rendering is enabled, use this slider to set  
the contrast, which can range from 100 to 300 percent.  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Advanced  
Text encoding: Choose a default character set for webpages.  
• Reset to default: Clear all browser data and reset all settings to  
the factory defaults.  
• Select search engine: Choose a search engine from Google,  
Yahoo!, or Bing.  
Bandwidth management  
• Open in background: When enabled, new windows open  
behind the current window.  
• Preload search results: Enable the browser to preload high  
confidence search results in the background to help speed up  
searches. Options are: Never, Only via Wi-Fi, or Always.  
• Load images: When enabled, images are automatically loaded  
when you visit a page. When disabled, images are indicated by  
a link, which you can touch to download the picture.  
Labs  
• Enable JavaScript: When enabled, Internet automatically runs  
JavaScript scripts on pages you visit.  
• Enable plug-ins: When enabled, Internet automatically loads  
and runs plug-ins on pages you visit.  
• Default storage: Select where Internet stores files.  
• Website settings: View and manage settings for individual  
websites.  
• Quick controls: When enabled, the Application and URL bars  
are hidden. To access the hidden controls, swipe inward from  
the left or right edge of the screen to access Quick Controls. For  
• Default zoom: Adjusts the zoom feature. Set to Far, Medium,  
or Close.  
• Open pages in overview: When enabled, displays an overview  
of newly-opened pages.  
• Auto-fit pages: When enabled, Internet automatically sizes  
webpages to fit your device’s display.  
• Google Instant: When enabled, you can use Google Instant  
when you use Google Search to show results as you type.  
Enabling this option can increase data use.  
• Block pop-ups: When enabled, blocks pop-up windows.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
90  
5. To cancel, display the Quick controls and touch  
Menu Settings Labs and touch Quick controls  
to uncheck it.  
Internet Quick Controls  
Use Quick Controls to maximize your viewing area while  
browsing the internet.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Internet  
.
Latitude  
2. While viewing a webpage, touch  
Menu  
Settings  
With Google Latitude, you can see the location of all of your  
friends on a map or on a list. You can also share or hide your  
location.  
Labs, and then touch Quick Controls to enable the  
function.  
The Application and URL bars are hidden.  
You must first set up your tablet to use wireless networks to  
help pinpoint your location. Also, Latitude works best when  
Wi-Fi is enabled.  
3. Swipe inward from the left or right edge of the screen  
to access quick controls.  
To enable Wi-Fi:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Settings  
Apps  
.
2. Touch Location services  
A green check mark  
enabled.  
Use wireless networks.  
indicates the feature is  
3. Under Wireless and network, on the Wi-Fi tab, touch the  
OFF / ON icon to turn Wi-Fi on.  
4. Without lifting your finger, move to an option and then  
lift your finger to initiate the option.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
4. Log on to your Google account.  
Your friend will receive an email or text message with your  
location marked on a map. They will also receive instructions  
on how to view your location from the Internet or use  
Latitude on their device, if it is available. Once they  
acknowledge your request, their location will display on your  
tablet. They can share their location from their computer,  
phone, or tablet.  
To create a Google account or set up your Google  
account on your device useAccounts and sync settings.  
5. Touch  
Home  
Apps  
Latitude.  
Your location is displayed on the map, accurate to 30  
meters.  
For more information, go to http://www.google.com/latitude  
.
Latitude Menu  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Latitude.  
Sharing Your Location with Friends  
Latitude  
Latitude  
1. From the Latitude map screen, touch  
2. Touch  
, if necessary.  
to display your Latitude list of friends. At first, only your  
name is displayed.  
3. Touch  
Menu for these options:  
• Add friends: Share your location with friends. For more  
information, refer to “Sharing Your Location with  
Friends” on page 92.  
2. Touch  
Menu  
Add friends.  
3. Touch Select from Contacts and touch a contact.  
– or –  
• Check in: Touch a location to check-in so others will know your  
location.  
Touch Add via email address, enter an email address,  
• Refresh friends: Update your Latitude list of friends.  
• Show stale friends / Hide stale friends: Show or hide friends  
depending on the accuracy of their Latitude information.  
and touch the Send key or close the keyboard and  
touch Add friends  
.
4. At the Send sharing requests prompt, touch Yes  
.
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
92  
• Location settings: Configures the location reporting settings.  
• Clear Map: Remove search results from the map.  
• Latitude: Allows you to find your friends and family on a map  
and share with people you choose.  
Navigating the Map  
Zooming  
Double-tap on the screen to zoom in.  
Use two fingers, such as your index finger  
and thumb, to zoom out by making an  
inward pinch motion on the screen. To zoom  
in, make an outward motion by sweeping your fingers out.  
• My Places: Displays a list of Starred places.  
• Settings: Configure settings. For more information, refer to  
Tip: For convenient browsing, you can rotate the device to  
• Help: Launches Google mobile Help.  
landscape mode.  
Maps  
Scrolling  
Use Google Maps to find your current location, get directions,  
and other location-based information.  
Touch and drag on the screen to reposition the map in the display.  
Touch  
Touch an icon on the map to display information about the  
Note: You must enable location services to use Maps. Some  
features require Standalone or Google location services.  
location. For example, your location is indicated by a flashing  
and a pop-up that displays your name.  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Maps.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Maps.  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Maps Menu  
Speak: Just speak a city, location, and so on, to  
display.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
2. While viewing a map, touch  
options:  
Maps  
.
Menu for these  
Compass: Set the map to always display north at  
the top of the screen or to automatically rotate like  
a compass, keeping north on the map facing  
north, and so on. Your device may have to be  
calibrated the first time you use this feature.  
Follow the on-screen instructions.  
• Clear Map: Remove search results from the map.  
• Join Latitude/Latitude: Join Latitude, to share your location  
with friends you choose and Google.  
• My Places: Display starred locations.  
Places: Launch the Places app. For more  
Directions: Displays the Directions pop-up. Enter  
My Location and End point or touch the button to  
the right of the fields to choose your current  
location, a contact’s location, or to touch a point  
on the map. Touch the automobile, bus, bicycle, or  
walking icon for the appropriate directions. Then  
touch Go to display a list of directions. Touch the  
Directions list and scroll up or down. Touch an  
entry in the Directions list to show the point  
mentioned on the map.  
• Help: Learn about Google maps.  
Other Map Options  
Touch the indicated icon to use these additional Map options:  
Search Maps: Use the keyboard to enter your  
request to Search the map for a city, location, and  
so on. Suggestions are displayed as you type.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
94  
Location reporting: To update your location automatically, set  
the following options:  
Layers: Enable or disable a map layer to display.  
Choose from Traffic, Satellite, Terrain, Transit  
Lines, Latitude, My Maps, Bicycling, or Wikipedia.  
• Detect your location: Enable or disable whether your  
location is updated automatically.  
Maps Settings  
Use the Maps settings to customize your Maps application.  
1. From the Home screen, touch Maps  
2. Touch Menu Settings to set the following Maps  
options:  
• Display: Set the following Maps display options:  
• Set your location: Set your location manually.  
• Do not update your location: Your friends cannot see  
your automatic location.  
.
Enable location history: This history is only seen by you.  
Manage your friends: Add or remove friends who can see  
your location.  
Zoom Buttons: If enabled, the zoom in (+) and zoom out (-)  
buttons are displayed on the map.  
Sign out of Latitude: Signs you out of Latitude and launches  
the Maps application.  
Scale bar: If enabled, the scale bar is displayed on the map,  
which shows the scale of the map in feet and meters.  
Automatic check-ins: Checks you in to places that you have  
designated.  
• Cache  
Check-in notifications: Enables notifications that suggest  
places to check in.  
Clear map tile cache: Touch OK to clear map tile cache.  
• Location settings: These settings display if you have joined  
Latitude.  
Manage your places: View and modify your automatic check-  
ins and muted places.  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Switch Account: Choose a different Google account. This  
option only appears if you have added more than one Google  
account on your device.  
2. Touch Accept to accept the Google Maps Navigation  
beta message.  
3. Touch  
in the Application bar and then touch either  
• Labs: Access experimental features.  
Driving or Walking to describe the type of directions  
you want.  
• What’s New: Link to Google Play Store where you can check  
for a Maps update.  
4. Touch  
Map in the Application bar to see a map  
(Driving) or a satellite image (Walking) of your area.  
• About: View information about Maps.  
5. Touch  
Menu for the following options:  
• Feedback: Display a Maps feedback form.  
Terms, Privacy & Notices: View information about Google  
Maps, including the Terms and Conditions, Privacy Policy, Legal  
Notices, and Web History.  
• Route options: Set whether directions should Avoid  
highways and Avoid tolls  
.
• Settings: Display Navigation settings:  
Screen dimming: Enable or disable screen dimming, which  
lets the screen dim between instructions to save power.  
Terms, privacy & notices: View Google’s Terms and  
conditions, Privacy policy, and Legal notices.  
Navigation  
Use Google Navigation to find a destination and to get  
walking or driving directions.  
Note: You must first create a Wi-Fi connection to use  
• Help: Display Navigation help information.  
Navigation.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Navigation  
Apps  
.
Internet and Social Networking  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
6. To find a destination, touch an option:  
• Speak destination: Say the name or address of your  
destination.  
Layers: Choose map layers to display.  
Menu: To display these options:  
• Type destination: Enter the destination.  
• Contacts: Choose a destination from a contact record.  
• Starred places: Choose destinations you have marked as  
favorites.  
Turn off voice/Turn on voice: Enable or  
disable voice-guided prompts.  
Exit navigation: Close Navigation and  
discard route information.  
• Recent destinations: Choose from recent destinations. This  
option is not available until a destination has been requested.  
Search: Find a location.  
Set destination: Choose or enter a  
destination.  
7. While navigating, touch:  
ROUTE AND ALTERNATES: View information  
about the current route and alternate routes.  
Settings: Enable or disable screen dimming  
and view Google’s Terms and conditions,  
Privacy policy, and Legal notices.  
Directions List: View directions in a step-by-  
step list.  
Help: Display Navigation help information.  
SHOW MAP: Return to the map view after  
viewing ROUTE AND ALTERNATES or the  
directions list.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The business details such as address, phone, website,  
and location are displayed. You can also see reviews  
from around the web and from Google users.  
Places  
Places is an application that uses Google Maps and your  
location to help you find Restaurants, Cafes, Bars,  
Attractions, and other businesses. You can also add your own  
locations.  
5. Touch your location at the bottom of the Places pop-up  
to write a review, check in here, view reviews and  
details, or choose another location nearby.  
The Places application allows you to find the best sources for  
business information across the web, including business  
listing details, reviews, photos, nearby public transit, and  
other related information. Business owners can provide  
additional details, such as photos, hours of operation, and  
coupons.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Choose your location and touch My current  
location or Enter an address. To enter an address, use  
the on-screen keyboard and then touch OK  
Play Books  
Use the Play Books app to read eBooks from the Internet-  
based Google Play™ Books service. Google eBooks is a new  
way to discover, buy, and enjoy your favorite books online  
and offline.  
Apps  
Places.  
You can read books online or mark them for availability  
offline, so you can read them when you have no Internet  
connection (such as on an airplane). You can also use Books  
as your starting point for browsing or searching for books on  
line.  
.
3. Touch one of the business categories to search for a  
particular business.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Books  
Apps  
All of the businesses in that category that are close to  
you display.  
.
The Google Play Books main screen displays.  
4. Touch a business in the list to see more details about it.  
Internet and Social Networking  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
4. On the Play Books main screen, touch  
Menu for  
Note: You may be asked to create or sign on to your Google  
these options:  
• Make available offline: Mark books to make them available  
offline. Touch below a book cover to mark it with a pin and  
. Just reverse this process to remove books  
then touch  
2. To add more books to your library, touch SHOP in the  
Application bar.  
from your device.  
• View as list / View as carousel: Set how you want to view  
your books.  
A pop-up displays a link to the Google Play Terms of  
Service. Read the document and touch Accept  
.
• Refresh: If a book in your library does not appear on your  
device, use this option to update the display.  
• Accounts: Set the account to use.  
Browse the selection of Google eBooks, which are  
arranged in categories like Featured, Top Selling, Top  
Rated, Top Free, and many more.  
• Help: Displays various Book help information. Touch Help  
Center to get additional Google Play Books information.  
5. Touch the cover of a book to start reading.  
3. To find a book by title or author name, touch  
Search on the Play Books main screen or touch SHOP  
Search.  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Available offline: Touch the check box to make the book  
available offline.  
Reading a Book  
Once the book displays:  
• Read aloud / Stop reading aloud: Touch to let your device  
read the book to you.  
1. Sweep across the screen to turn the page.  
2. Touch the screen to display or hide the following  
options.  
• Help: Touch Help center  
,
Contact us, or Report a problem to  
Privacy  
link the appropriate website. Touch Terms of Service  
,
3. Touch  
for a table of contents.  
Policy, or Open source licenses to read those documents. The  
Play Books version number is also displayed.  
4. Touch  
to set THEME (day or night), BRIGHTNESS,  
TYPEFACE, FONT SIZE, TEXT ALIGNMENT, and LINE  
HEIGHT.  
7. Touch and drag the slider at the bottom of the page to  
display a different page, which is indicated by the  
pop-up.  
5. Touch  
touch SHOP  
6. Touch Menu for these additional options:  
• Original pages Flowing text: Display the pages of the book  
Search on the Play Books main screen or  
Search  
.
8. To contact customer support, report an issue, and  
display more Google eBooks information, from a Home  
/
screen, touch  
Menu  
Apps  
Help  
Play Books  
in their original format or use your format settings.  
• About the book: Displays the Google Play description of the  
book.  
.
• Share: Share the book by using Bluetooth, ChatON, Dropbox,  
Email, Gmail, Google+, S Note, or Wi-Fi Direct.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
100  
3. Touch a suggestion to search for that term.  
Search  
– or –  
Search the internet using the Google search engine.  
Touch  
on the keyboard to start the search.  
Tip: The Google Search widget displays by default on all Home  
screens. For information about displaying widgets on the  
A browser window displays the search results.  
YouTube  
View and upload YouTube videos right from your device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
YouTube  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Google.  
.
– or –  
2. Touch the HOME tab to return to the main YouTube  
page.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Search.  
2. Use the keyboard to enter search criteria to display  
3. Touch the BROWSE tab to browse videos by categories  
like Comedy, Education, Music, and so on. Touch the  
desired category to display video thumbnails.  
4. Touch the ACCOUNT tab to choose which Google  
account you would like to use or add an account. Once  
you are signed in, touch ACCOUNT to display your  
subscriptions, see your favorites, see you watch later  
list, manage your playlists, or upload a video.  
matching searches.  
– or –  
Touch  
and speak the search criteria slowly and  
clearly. Google searches for the information and  
displays results.  
Suggestions display below the text entry area.  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
5. Touch  
enter a keyword or phrase to find a YouTube video.  
Touch on the keyboard to initiate the search.  
6. While browsing, touch Menu for these options:  
Search YouTube and use the keyboard to  
3. Touch  
Menu for these options:  
• Copy URL: Copy the URL of the video to the clipboard. For  
• Sign in / Sign out: Sign in, sign out, or add an account. You  
may have to sign in to use certain options.  
• Flag: Flag the video for YouTube review.  
• Settings: Configure display and search settings and view  
information about the application.  
• Settings: Configure display and search settings and view  
information about the application.  
• Help: Display YouTube help information.  
• Help: Display YouTube help information.  
• Feedback: Display a YouTube feedback form.  
• Feedback: Display a YouTube feedback form.  
7. Touch a video thumbnail to view the video.  
Options While Viewing a Video  
Use these options while viewing a video:  
1. Touch  
Add to, which lets you add the video to your  
watch later list or your favorites, or add a new playlist.  
2. Touch  
Share to use ChatON, Google+, Wi-Fi Direct,  
S Note, Dropbox, Bluetooth, Gmail, or Email to send the  
video’s URL.  
Internet and Social Networking  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
102  
Section 7: Music  
This section explains how to use the music features of your  
device including the Music app, the Music Player, and the  
Music Hub.  
Accessing the Music App  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Play Music.  
Play Music App  
The Play Music app contains a music player that plays music  
and other audio files that you copy from your computer or store  
online.  
The Play Music app searches your online library and  
your device’s internal storage for music and playlists.  
This can take from a few seconds to several minutes,  
depending on the amount of new music added since  
you last opened the application.  
Note: Some options described in this manual may not be  
available until you sign in to your Google account.  
It then displays a carousel view of your new and recent  
music, organized by album.  
Google Play Music  
Google PlayTM Music is a new service from Google that gives  
you instant access to your personal music collection on the  
hassle of wires or syncing. For more information, visit  
music.google.com  
.
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
2. Swipe left or right to spin the carousel and browse  
through your new and recent music.  
Note: The contents of your library display in a scrolling grid,  
list, or carousel, depending on the view.  
3. Touch an album to open it.  
4. Return to the Library screen from most other screens  
in the Music application by touching the Music  
Searching for Music  
To find music in your library:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
application icon  
bar.  
at the top-left of the Application  
Apps  
Play Music  
.
2. Touch  
Search  
.
Changing Library View  
You can change the way you view the contents of your  
library.  
3. Type the name of an artist, album, song, or playlist.  
Touch on the keyboard to remove the keyboard.  
Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search  
box.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
Apps  
.
2. Touch the name of the current view, such as Recent  
,
4. Touch a matching song to play it, touch a matching  
near the top-left of the Application bar.  
album, artist, or playlist to view a list of its songs, or  
3. Touch an option to set how you view your library.  
touch  
next to an item in the list to play it, add it to  
a playlist, or shop for other music by the artist online.  
The choices are: Recent  
,
Albums, Artists, Songs,  
Playlists, or Genres  
.
Music  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Offline music only: Display only the music that is available  
offline.  
Changing Music Settings  
To change settings in the Music application:  
• Hide labels / Show labels: Hide or show labels. This option is  
not available in all library views.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Play Music  
Menu  
.
• Settings: Displays the Settings screen. Choose a Google  
account to use to connect to Google PlayTM Music and set the  
Music settings as indicated on the screen. The Music app  
version is also displayed.  
2. Touch  
.
The following options display depending on the library  
view:  
• Shuffle all: Play all songs in a random order.  
• Help: Opens the Browser with information about the Music  
application.  
• Hide now playing bar / Show now playing bar: Hide or show  
the Now Playing bar that displays at the bottom of the screen.  
You can return to the Now playing screen from other Music  
screens by touching the name of the current song in the Now  
Playing bar.  
Listening to Music  
You can listen to music by using your device’s built-in  
speakers, through a wired headset, or through a wireless  
• Make available offline: In addition to playing the music that  
you add to your online library, you can play music stored on  
your device’s internal storage. Then you can listen to music  
when you have no Internet connection. To do this, make some  
of your online music available offline. For more information,  
Touch the Volume Key  
on the side of the  
device to activate on-screen volume control, then touch and  
drag on the scale to set volume. You can also press the  
Volume Key to adjust playback volume.  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Options While Selecting a Song  
The following options are available for playing songs,  
albums, or playlist, finding more information about artists,  
finding more music, and deleting songs:  
Playing Music  
To play a song:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Play Music.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
Apps  
2. Touch a song in your library to listen to it.  
.
– or –  
2. Touch an album or song.  
While viewing a list of songs, touch  
and touch Play  
next to a song  
3. Touch the label area  
under an item.  
.
The following options display depending on the item  
view:  
– or –  
While viewing a list of albums, artists, playlists, or  
• Play: Plays the selected song, album, or playlist.  
• Add to playlist: Add the song to a new playlist or an existing  
playlist.  
genres, the label area  
Play  
under an item and touch  
.
The Now playing screen opens and the song you  
touched or the first song in the album or playlist starts  
to play. The tracks in the current list play in order until  
you reach the end of the list (unless you choose a  
repeat option). Otherwise, playback stops only if you  
stop it, even when you switch applications.  
• More by artist: View any other music in your library by the  
artist that performs this song.  
• Shop for artist: Launches Google to search for more songs by  
the selected artist.  
• Delete: Delete the song.  
• Search: Search the Internet, Music Player, Play Music, or  
YouTube for an artist, album, or song.  
Music  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Options While Playing a Song  
When you play a song, the Now playing screen displays.  
There are various options and controls available while a song  
is playing:  
Note: If you navigate away from the Now playing screen in the  
Music application, the Now Playing bar displays at the  
bottom of the screen. You can use this to control  
playback or touch  
Menu  
Hide now playing bar.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
Apps  
.
Displaying the Now Playing Screen  
If you navigate away from the Now playing screen, to return  
to the Now playing screen from other Music screens:  
The Now playing screen displays.  
Touch the name of the current song in the Now Playing  
bar.  
– or –  
3. Touch the SONG title to add the song to a playlist.  
4. Touch the ARTIST name to view information about the  
artist associated with this song.  
Touch the Music notification icon  
in the System  
Bar, and in the Status Details panel, touch the song  
title.  
5. Touch ALBUM to list and play the songs on the album.  
6. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
• Sound effects: Touch and slide the various controls to adjust  
various sound effects.  
You can also pause and resume playback and skip to  
the next or previous song in the Status Details panel.  
• Settings: Displays the Music settings screen.  
Google Play account: Choose a Google account to use to  
connect to Google PlayTM Music and then set the Music settings  
as indicated on the screen. This option only appears if you have  
added a Google account on your device.  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Open source licenses: Displays the open source licenses for  
Google Play Music.  
Touch to advance to the next song. Touch and  
hold to scanforward through the current song.  
Music version: The Google Play Music app version is  
displayed.  
Touch to repeat the current song, repeat all  
songs, or disable repeat mode.  
• Help: View online help from Google.  
7. The Now playing screen contains several buttons that  
you can touch to control the playback of songs,  
albums, and playlists:  
When Shuffle mode is enabled, songs play in  
randomorder.Whendisabled, songsplayinthe  
order they appear in List view.  
Touch Thumbs up or Thumbs down to add the  
song to a Thumbs up or Thumbs down playlist.  
Creating a Playlist  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
2. Touch the Playlists library view.  
3. Touch  
The New playlist pop-up displays.  
Apps  
Touch to go back to the previous song. Touch  
and hold to scan backward through the current  
song.  
.
.
Touch to pause playback.  
Touch to resume playback  
4. Touch the NAME field to enter a name for the playlist.  
5. Touch OK to save the new playlist.  
Music  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. Touch  
next to a playlist title.  
Adding Songs To a Playlist  
To add a song to a new or existing playlist while the song is  
playing:  
Touch Play to play the songs in the playlist.  
Touch Rename and use the keyboard to enter a new name for  
the playlist.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
2. Touch an album or song list and play a song.  
3. Touch SONG  
Apps  
.
Touch Delete and then touch OK to delete the playlist. Only the  
playlist is deleted. To delete individual songs, see “Options  
.
4. If the Add to new playlist pop-up displays, touch the  
NAME field to enter a name for the playlist.  
– or –  
Shopping for Music at the Play Store  
To visit the Google PlayTM Store where you can find and buy  
music  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Music  
:
Play Store  
.
If the Add to playlist pop-up displays, touch the playlist  
to which you want to add the song or touch New  
playlist to create a new playlist.  
.
The Google Play Store music section displays.  
5. Touch OK  
.
To view information about finding and buying music:  
The playlist is saved with the song added to it.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Play Music  
.
Playing, Renaming, or Deleting a Playlist  
To play, rename, or delete a playlist:  
2. Touch  
Menu Help.  
3. Touch Music  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
Apps  
.
2. Display the Playlists library view.  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
A green pin  
available offline.  
indicates that the item is already  
Making Online Music Available Offline  
In addition to playing the music that you add to your online  
library, you can play music stored on your device’s internal  
storage. Then you can listen to music when you have no  
Internet connection. To do this, make some of your online  
music available offline.  
Gray pins appear next to the items you can make  
available offline. A bar at the bottom of the screen  
shows how much space is available on your device for  
music and other files.  
Tip: You can also copy music directly from your computer to  
Dim green pins indicate songs or albums that you  
copied directly from a computer to your device.  
4. Touch the gray pin next to each item you want to make  
available offline or touch a green pin to stop making it  
available offline. You can switch to other views of your  
library to make other kinds of items available offline as  
well.  
To make your online music available offline on your device:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
Apps  
.
2. Change your library view to Albums, Artists, or  
5. Touch Done in the bar at the bottom of the screen.  
The Music application starts downloading the items to  
your device.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Make available offline and touch  
the album or playlist you want to make available  
offline.  
Music  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Managing Your Music  
Searching for Music  
To find music in your library:  
Viewing Your Music Library  
The Music Player plays music and other audio files that you copy  
from your computer.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Music Player  
Apps  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
.
Music Player  
.
The Music player application searches your device’s  
internal storage for music and playlists. This can take  
from a few seconds to several minutes, depending on  
the amount of new music added since you last opened  
the application. It then displays your music in several  
ways.  
2. Touch  
Search  
.
3. Type the name of an artist, album, or song.  
Matching songs are displayed in a list below the search  
box.  
4. Touch a matching song to play it. Touch a matching  
album, or artist to view a list of its songs.  
Creating a Playlist  
2. Touch Songs  
,
Playlists  
,
Albums  
,
Artists  
,
Genres  
,
Folders  
,
Composers Years, or Music square to change the way  
,
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
you view the contents of your library.  
Music Player  
Playlists.  
3. Touch the Music application icon  
at the top-left of  
2. Touch  
New playlist.  
the Application bar to return to the previous Music  
screen.  
3. Touch the name field to enter a name for the playlist.  
4. Touch OK to save the new playlist.  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Renaming a Playlist  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
4. Touch Done to save the playlist.  
Removing Songs from Playlists  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Music Player  
2. Touch Playlists, touch a playlist, and then touch  
Menu Rename playlist  
.
Apps  
Music Player  
.
.
2. Touch  
and touch a playlist.  
3. Touch the name field to enter a new name for the  
playlist.  
All songs are displayed to the left of the playlist and the  
songs in the playlist are displayed on the right, under  
the playlist name.  
4. Touch OK to save the new playlist.  
Adding Songs to Playlists  
3. Touch  
to remove a song from the playlist.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
4. Touch Done to save the playlist.  
Music Player  
.
Changing the Order of a Playlist  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch  
– or –  
and touch a playlist.  
Apps  
Music Player  
2. Touch Playlists and touch a playlist.  
3. Touch Reorder to change the order of the songs.  
Touch the grid on an entry and drag the entry to a  
.
Touch Playlists, touch a playlist, and then touch  
Add music  
All songs are displayed.  
3. Touch next to each song you want to add or next to  
.
new position in the list.  
4. Touch Done to change the order and save the playlist.  
Add all to add all songs to the playlist.  
The songs appear under the playlist to the right of the  
songs list.  
Music  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Playing a Playlist  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Changing Music Settings  
To change settings in the Music application:  
Apps  
Music Player  
2. Display the Playlists library view.  
3. Touch Favorites Most played, or Recently added, or  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Music Player  
.
,
2. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
touch a playlist title that you created.  
4. Touch a song to start playing the playlist at that song.  
Deleting a Playlist  
• Delete: Touch the box for any song or album you want to delete  
or touch the box for Select all to select every song or album. A  
check mark  
indicates the song or album is to be deleted.  
Touch Delete to delete the selected items.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Music Player  
2. Touch Playlists and touch a playlist.  
3. Touch Delete in the Application bar.  
Apps  
• Share via: Share your music by using Group Cast, Dropbox,  
Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, Gmail, or Email. Select the songs you  
.
want to share and touch Share  
.
• Set as alarm tone: Choose a song and touch Set to use the  
song as an alarm tone.  
4. Touch the box next to a playlist title. A check mark  
indicates the playlist is to be deleted.  
5. Touch Remove and then touch OK to delete the selected  
playlist.  
• Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to  
nearby devices.  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Settings: The following settings display:  
Touch the Volume Key  
on the side of the  
device to activate on-screen volume control, then touch and  
drag on the scale to set volume. You can also press the  
Volume Key to adjust playback volume.  
Advanced  
Sound settings: Choose SoundAlive and Play speed  
settings.  
Playing Music  
To play a song:  
Lyrics: Display the lyrics of the song, if available.  
Music auto off: Set the option Off or set your music to turn off  
automatically after 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 1 hour and  
30 minutes, or 2 hours.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Music Player  
Apps  
.
2. Touch a song in your library to listen to it.  
Music menu  
Music menu: Enable or disable the music display options that  
– or –  
appear on the main music screen. A check mark  
an option means that it is enabled.  
next to  
While viewing a list of albums or genres, touch the  
album thumbnail and then touch a song in the list of  
songs on the album.  
Listening to Music  
You can listen to music by using your device’s built-in  
speakers, through a wired headset or through a wireless  
Bluetooth stereo headset.  
The song you touch starts to play. The tracks in the  
current list play in order until you reach the end of the  
list (unless you choose a repeat option). Otherwise,  
playback stops only if you stop it, even when you  
switch applications.  
Music  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Accessing the Music Player  
If you navigate away from the Music Player application and  
music is playing, you can change songs or easily return to  
the Music player:  
Artist /  
Album  
SoundAlive  
Song Title  
List  
Mode  
Favorite  
Volume  
Info  
1. Touch the Music notification icon  
in the System  
Bar.  
2. In the Status Details, touch the song title to display the  
Music player. You can also pause and resume playback  
and skip to the next or previous song in the panel. For  
Music Player  
Music Player plays music and other audio files that you copy from  
your computer.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Music Player  
Apps  
.
Playback Controls  
Repeat  
Time  
Indicators  
Progress  
Bar  
Shuffle  
2. Touch a song or playlist to begin playback.  
The music player displays below (portrait mode) or to  
the right (landscape mode) of the music listing.  
4. During playback, use the sound and playlist controls:  
• Favorite: Touch the star  
to mark the current song as a  
3. Touch the music player to enlarge it and touch the  
favorite.  
screen to display the sound and playlist controls.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Volume: Touch to toggle Vibration or Silent mode and Sound  
mode, then touch and drag on the scale to set volume. You can  
also press the Volume Key on the side of the device to adjust  
playback volume.  
Options While Playing a Song  
There are various options and controls available while a song  
is playing:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
• SoundAlive: Touch to view and set SoundAlive options.  
• Info: Touch to view information about the current song.  
• List Mode: Touch to switch to the list of songs.  
• Shuffle: When enabled, songs play in random order. When  
disabled, songs play in the order they appear in List view.  
• Progress Bar: Touch and drag the end of the progress bar to  
scan forward or backward through the current song.  
• Playback Controls: These buttons control the playback of  
songs:  
Music Player, touch a song or an album, and  
then a song.  
2. Touch the music player to enlarge it.  
3. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
• Add to playlist: Add the song to a new playlist or an existing  
playlist.  
• Via Bluetooth: Play the current song by using a Bluetooth  
device.  
• Share via: Share the current song by using Group Cast,  
Dropbox, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, Gmail, or Email.  
• Set as alarm tone: Use the current song as an alarm tone.  
• Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to  
nearby devices.  
Touch  
to advance to the next song. Touch and hold  
to  
scan forward through the current song.  
Touch  
Touch  
to go back to the previous song. Touch and hold  
to scan backward through the current song.  
• Settings: Displays Music Player settings. For more information,  
to pause playback. Touch  
to resume playback.  
• Repeat: Touch to repeat the current song, repeat all songs, or  
disable repeat mode.  
Music  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Playlists: Displays downloaded playlists and your library of  
songs and albums. Touch New to create a new playlist.  
• My page: Displays the following options:  
Music Hub  
Samsung Music Hub makes your device a personal music  
manager and lets you access, buy, and download millions of  
music tracks. Access top albums, top tracks, featured  
albums, and new releases. Music Hub allows you to search  
for tracks, albums, and artists. Enjoy music samples before  
you download them directly to your Wi-Fi Galaxy Tab.  
Basket: Displays songs that you have selected to buy. Touch  
Buy to start the purchase process. Touch  
Delete all to clear your basket or touch  
songs from your basket.  
Menu  
Remove to delete  
Purchase List: Displays a list of your purchases.  
Payment information: Allows you to set up your payment  
method. Touch Add card to enter your payment information.  
Help: Display help information for Music Hub.  
Note: You must sign up for an account before accessing some  
of the Music Hub options.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Music Hub  
Apps  
.
Note: You have to be signed in to use some options. To sign in,  
touch Sign in and use the keyboard to enter your Email  
address and Music Hub Password. Touch Sign in. Touch  
Create account to set up a new account.  
2. Read the Disclaimer and touch Confirm to continue or  
Back to exit.  
The Music Hub Home screen displays.  
3. Touch one of the following options:  
• Featured: This is the Music Hub home screen. Displays top  
albums, featured albums, top tracks, new releases, and more.  
Touch an item to display more information and prices.  
• Genres: Displays bestsellers and new releases by genre, such  
as pop, rock, jazz, comedy, and blues.  
4. Touch  
word or phrase to search for tracks, albums, or artists.  
Touch on the keyboard to search Music Hub.  
Search and use the keyboard to enter a key  
Touch an item to play a sample, add an item to your  
basket, or add an item to your album.  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Making a Purchase  
You can use Music Hub to buy albums or individual tracks.  
You can also build your own album from various tracks.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Music Hub  
2. Touch an album or a track.  
3. Touch next to an album to add the album to your  
Apps  
.
basket or next to each track that you want to add to  
your basket.  
4. Touch  
next to an album to add the album to your  
album or next to each track that you want to add to  
your album. Touch New to create a new album.  
Music  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 8: Photos and Video  
This section explains how to use your device’s built-in  
camera and camcorder, the Video Player app to view and  
manage videos, and the Gallery app to view, capture, and  
manage photos and videos. It also contains an overview of  
the PS Touch app, Media Hub, and Video Maker apps.  
Touch Cancel to use the device storage for storing  
pictures and videos.  
Note: If memory card storage is used, photos are stored in the  
/Root/extSdCard/DCIM/Camera folder as jpg files. For  
Camera  
Use your device’s built-in camera and camcorder to take  
photos and record videos.  
The Camera screen displays.  
GPS Storage  
Active Indicator  
Settings  
Shortcuts  
Tip: A shortcut to Camera displays on a Home screen by  
default.  
Mode  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Camera.  
– or –  
Camera  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Camera.  
If a memory card is inserted, the Storage location  
pop-up displays.  
Image  
Viewer  
2. Touch OK to change the storage location to memory  
card.  
– or –  
Settings  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Taking Photos  
To take a photo:  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Camera Settings  
Before you start taking photos, use the camera settings to  
configure the camera for best results. Camera settings are  
represented by icons on the left side of the screen.  
Editing Camera Settings Shortcuts  
Camera.  
2. Using the display as a viewfinder, compose your photo  
by aiming the lens at the subject.  
The first five icons are actually shortcuts to camera settings.  
These five shortcuts can be customized to fit your  
preference.  
3. To take the photo, touch the Camera button.  
Self-portrait  
,
Flash  
,
Shooting mode,  
4. Touch  
Back to leave the Camera and display the  
Effects, and  
Exposure value are default settings  
previous screen.  
shortcuts.  
To customize these shortcuts:  
Important! Do not take photos of people without their  
permission.  
1. Touch  
Settings  
Edit shortcuts.  
Do not take photos in places where cameras are  
not allowed.  
Do not take photos in places where you may  
interfere with another person’s privacy.  
– or –  
Touch and hold any of the shortcut icons to edit them.  
2. Touch and hold a setting, then drag and drop it on one  
of the five settings shortcuts to the left. The replaced  
setting shortcut displays in the edit list.  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
120  
       
Configuring Camera Settings  
To configure Camera settings:  
Panorama: Touch the Camera button to take a photo, then use  
the on-screen guideline to move the viewfinder and take the  
next 7 shots automatically.  
While in Camera mode, touch a settings shortcut or  
Cartoon: Take a photo with cartoon effects.  
Share shot: Share photos with other users via Wi-Fi Direct. A  
Wi-Fi Direct connection is required.  
touch  
settings:  
Settings to configure the following camera  
• Edit shortcuts: Customize your settings shortcuts. For more  
Buddy photo share: Take and share photos with friends via  
face detection.  
• Self-portrait: Touch to switch to the front-facing camera lens  
and take a photo of yourself.  
• Scene mode: Choose an automatic scene mode from None,  
Portrait, Landscape, Night, Sports, Party/Indoor, Beach/Snow,  
Sunset, Dawn, Fall Color, Text, Candlelight, or Backlight.  
• Exposure value: Use the slider to set the exposure value from  
-2.0 to +2.0.  
• Flash: Choose a flash mode from Off, On, or Auto flash. Off is  
the default.  
Warning! If the battery is low, the flash is not available. For  
• Focus mode: Set the focus mode to Auto focus or Macro.  
• Timer: Set a timer for how long to wait before taking a photo.  
Options are: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec.  
• Effects: Apply an effect to photos. Options are: None, Negative,  
Black and white, or Sepia.  
• Shooting mode: Choose an automatic shooting mode, from:  
Single shot: Take a single photo.  
Smile shot: Touch the Camera button to automatically focus on  
the subject’s face and take the photo.  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
• Resolution: Set a size for the image. Options are:  
5M (2560x1920), W3.6M (2560x1440), 3.2M (2048x1536),  
W2.4M (2048x1152), 2M (1600X1200), W1.3M (1536x864),  
and 0.3M (640x480).  
• GPS tag: Enable or disable tagging of photos with your GPS  
location. displays on the screen when this option is active.  
Caution! Be aware that your location may be present on a  
photo when posting your photos on the internet.  
• White balance: Set the light source. Options are: Auto,  
Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent, or Fluorescent.  
• Storage: Set whether to store you photos on your device or on  
your memory card.  
• ISO: This value determines how sensitive the light meter is on  
your digital camera. Choose from Auto, 100, 200, or 400. Use  
a lower ISO number to make your camera less sensitive to light,  
a higher ISO number to take photos with less light, or Auto to let  
the camera automatically adjust the ISO for each of your shots.  
• Metering: Set how the camera measures or meters the light  
source: Center-weighted, Spot, or Matrix.  
• Reset: Set all Camera settings to the defaults.  
Viewing Photos with the Image Viewer  
After taking a photo, use the Image Viewer to view, share,  
delete, or edit photos.  
1. Touch Image Viewer to view the photo.  
2. Touch the screen to show or hide Image Viewer  
options.  
• Outdoor visibility: When taking outdoor shots in bright  
settings, enabling Outdoor visibility Illuminates your screen to  
make it easier to see what you are shooting.  
3. Touch the screen with two fingers or double-tap on the  
screen to zoom all the way in or out. For more  
4. Sweep across the screen to display the next or  
previous photo. The current photo is outlined in the  
thumbnails at the bottom of the screen. Touch a  
thumbnail to view the photo it represents.  
Note: What you see on screen will not correspond to the  
luminance of the actual photograph taken.  
• Guidelines: Enable or disable an on-screen grid to aid in photo  
composition.  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
122  
5. Touch  
Share to use Group Cast, S Note, ChatON,  
Camcorder  
Use your device’s built-in Camcorder to record high-  
definition video in 1080p resolution.  
Dropbox, Picasa, Google+, Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct,  
Gmail, or Email to share the photo.  
6. To delete the photo being displayed, touch  
and then touch Delete to delete the photo or Cancel to  
exit.  
Delete  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Camera.  
2. Slide the  
Mode button to the  
Camcorder  
setting.  
7. Touch  
Slideshow to display a slide show of the  
The Camcorder screen displays.  
available pictures and videos.  
Settings  
Shortcuts  
Current or  
Elapsed Time  
Storage  
Indicator  
8. Touch  
Menu to select Set picture as to assign the  
photo as a Contact photo, Home and lock screens,  
Home screen wallpaper, or Lock screen wallpaper.  
Mode  
Record  
Note: Photos are stored in the /Root/sdcard/DCIM/Camera  
Image  
Viewer  
9. Press  
photos.  
Back to return to the Camera to take more  
File Size  
Available  
Storage  
Settings  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Recording Videos  
Camcorder Settings  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Camera  
.
Before you start taking videos, use the camcorder settings to  
configure the camcorder for best results. Camcorder settings  
are represented by icons on the left side of the screen.  
Editing Camcorder Settings Shortcuts  
As with the camera, the first five icons are actually shortcuts  
to camcorder settings. These five shortcuts can be  
customized to fit your preference.  
2. Slide the  
Mode button to the Camcorder  
setting.  
3. Using the display as a viewfinder, compose your shot  
by aiming the lens at the subject.  
Self-recording  
,
Flash  
,
Recording mode,  
4. To start recording, touch  
Record.  
Effects, and  
Exposure value are default settings  
During recording, the Record button flashes.  
shortcuts.  
5. Touch  
6. Touch  
Record to stop recording.  
Back to leave the Camcorder and display  
the previous screen.  
Configuring Camcorder Settings  
To configure Camcorder settings:  
Important! Do not take videos of people without their  
permission.  
While in Camcorder mode, touch a settings shortcut or  
touch Settings to configure the following  
Do not take videos in places where cameras are  
not allowed.  
Camcorder settings:  
Do not take videos in places where you may  
interfere with another person’s privacy.  
• Edit shortcuts: Customize your settings shortcuts. For more  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
124  
     
• Self-recording: Touch to switch to the front-facing camera  
lens and record a video of yourself.  
Note: What you see on screen will not correspond to the  
luminance of the actual video taken.  
• Flash: Touch Off or On to disable or enable the flash.  
• Recording mode: Set a recording mode. Options are: Normal  
and Limit for email, which limits the size of the video to 50  
megabytes.  
• Guidelines: Enable or disable an on-screen grid to aid in video  
composition.  
• Video quality: Set video quality. Options are: Superfine, Fine, or  
Normal.  
• Exposure value: Use the slider to set the exposure value from  
-2.0 to +2.0.  
• Storage: Set whether to store you videos on your device or on  
your memory card.  
• Timer: Set a timer for how long to wait before recording a  
video. Options are: Off, 2 sec, 5 sec, and 10 sec.  
• Effects: Apply an effect to videos. Options are: None, Negative,  
Black and white, or Sepia.  
• Reset: Set all Camera settings to the defaults.  
Viewing Videos with the Image Viewer  
After recording a video, use the Image Viewer to play, share,  
or delete your video.  
1. Touch Image Viewer to view the video.  
• Resolution: Set a size for the video. Options are: 1280x720,  
720x480, 640x480, or 320x240.  
• White balance: Set the light source. Options are: Auto,  
Daylight, Cloudy, Incandescent, or Fluorescent.  
• Outdoor visibility: When recording outdoors in bright settings,  
enabling Outdoor visibility Illuminates your screen to make it  
easier to see what you are recording.  
2. Touch the screen to show or hide Image Viewer  
options.  
3. Sweep across the screen to display the next or  
previous video. The current video is outlined in the  
thumbnails at the bottom of the screen. Touch a  
thumbnail to view the video it represents.  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Touch  
Share to use ChatON, Dropbox, Google+,  
8. Touch and drag the  
white dot on the progress  
Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, YouTube, Gmail, or Email to  
share the video.  
bar to fast forward or rewind the video. Touch the left  
end of the progress bar to restart the video. Touch the  
right end of the progress bar to end the video playback.  
– or –  
5. To delete the video being displayed, touch  
and then touch Delete to delete the video or Cancel to  
exit.  
Delete  
Touch  
Fast Forward to end the video.  
9. Touch SoundAlive to set the sound quality to  
Normal, Voice, Movie, or Virtual 7.1 ch.  
10. Touch Inset to play a video as a small inset while  
Rewind to restart the video or  
6. Touch  
Slideshow to display a slide show of the  
available pictures and videos.  
Note: Videos are stored in the /Root/sdcard/DCIM/Camera  
viewing another screen. Touch and drag the inset video  
to the desired location on the screen.  
7. To play a video, touch  
pause the video and touch  
playing the video.  
Play. Touch  
Pause to  
11. Touch  
Multiscreen to split and share the screen  
Resume to resume  
12. Press  
Back to return to the Camcorder.  
Photos and Video  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Auto play next: Touch to enable or disable automatic playing of  
videos in the order they appear.  
Video Player  
Your device’s 10.1-inch 1280x800 WXGA TFT (PLS) LCD  
screen provides playback of videos. Use Video Player to view  
and manage videos stored on your tablet.  
• Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to  
nearby devices.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Video Player  
2. Touch the Thumbnails  
3. Touch  
search term. The current folder is searched and results  
are displayed. Touch to remove the search field.  
4. Touch Multiscreen to split and share the screen  
Apps  
6. Touch a video to play it. While playing a video, touch  
the screen to display or hide on-screen playback  
controls.  
.
,
List, or Folders tab.  
Search and use the keyboard to enter a  
7. Touch the icon in the upper left corner of the display  
screen while the video is playing to change the Display  
Mode from original size to full screen in ratio or full  
screen.  
X
• Original Size  
(
): Changes the display mode to the original  
size.  
• Full-Screen in Ratio View  
(
): Changes the display mode  
5. While viewing the list, touch  
Menu for options:  
to the full-screen in ratio option. The video is enlarged as much  
as possible without becoming distorted.  
• List by: Display videos by Name (default), Date, Size, or Type.  
• Share via: Share the video with Dropbox, Google+, Bluetooth,  
Wi-Fi Direct, YouTube, Gmail, or Email.  
• Full-Screen View  
(
): Changes the display mode to full  
screen. That is, the entire screen is used, which may cause  
some minor distortion.  
• Delete: Touch videos to select them for deletion or touch  
Select all to delete all videos. Touch Delete to deleted the  
selected videos.  
8. Touch  
SoundAlive to set the sound quality to  
Normal, Voice, Movie, or Virtual 7.1 ch.  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
9. Touch  
Inset to play a video as a small inset while  
• Settings: Touch this option to view the following:  
viewing another screen. Touch and drag the inset video  
to the desired location on the screen.  
Play speed: Touch and drag the slider to decrease or increase  
play speed.  
10. While the video is playing, touch  
Bookmark to  
Subtitles: View subtitles for the video, if available.  
Auto play next: Enable or disable auto play of the next video.  
Color tone: Set the color tone to Normal, Warm, or Cold.  
Outdoor visibility: Turn outdoor visibility On or Off.  
mark your favorite areas of the video. A yellow mark  
displays on the progress bar.  
11. During playback, press  
Menu for options:  
• Share via: Send the video by ChatON, Dropbox, Google+,  
Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, YouTube, Gmail, or Email.  
• Chapter preview: If chapter information is recorded in the  
video file, display the chapters. Touch a chapter to begin  
playing the video at that point.  
• Details: Provides details about the video, such as Name, Size,  
Resolution, Duration, Format, and Date modified.  
• Video auto off: Automatically turn off the video. Options are:  
Off, After playing, After 15 min, After 30 min, After 1 hr,  
After 1 hr 30 min, or After 2 hr.  
Trim: Trim the original video or trim the video and create a new  
video.  
• Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to  
nearby devices.  
• Via Bluetooth: Turn Bluetooth on to use Bluetooth services.  
• Video Maker: Open this video in the Video maker app. For  
• Bookmarks: If bookmarks have been set for this video, a  
thumbnail and time are displayed for each bookmark. Touch  
to remove a bookmark or touch Delete all to delete all  
bookmarks from this video.  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
128  
5. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
Gallery  
• Select album / Select group: Touch one or more albums or  
groups that you want to share, stream to another device, or  
delete.  
Your device’s 10.1-inch 1280x800 WXGA TFT (PLS) LCD screen  
provides a high-resolution display of photos and videos.  
Use Gallery to view, capture, and manage photos and videos.  
• Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to  
nearby devices.  
Selecting Photos and Videos to View  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gallery.  
• View by: View albums by All content, Content in device, or  
Content in Facebook.  
All albums display.  
2. Touch Albums to display other ways to group your  
photos and videos. Options are:  
Viewing Groups of Photos and Videos  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gallery.  
• Albums: Based on the folder in which they are stored.  
• Locations: Based on where taken.  
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it.  
Thumbnails for each photo and video in the group  
display.  
• Time: Based on the time taken.  
• Person: Based on pictures in which a face was detected.  
3. Touch  
available pictures and videos.  
4. Touch Menu for these options:  
Slideshow to view a slideshow of the  
• Group: Based on the contact group of the person in the picture.  
3. Touch  
4. Touch  
Camera to launch the Camera app.  
Multiscreen to split and share the screen  
• Select item: Touch one or more items that you want to share  
or delete.  
• Group by: Further group this group by Location, Time, Person,  
or Group, depending on the way you chose the group.  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
8. Touch  
Slideshow to view a slideshow of photos  
Viewing Photos and Videos  
and video thumbnails in the group. Touch the screen to  
stop the slideshow and view the photo or video being  
displayed.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gallery.  
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then  
touch a photo or video thumbnail.  
9. Touch  
photos:  
Menu to display the following options for  
3. Touch the screen to show or hide Gallery options.  
4. Touch the screen with two fingers or double-tap on the  
screen to zoom all the way in or out. For more  
• Face tag: Set whether to look for a face in this picture.  
• Copy to clipboard: Copy the current photo to the clipboard.  
• Rotateleft: Allows you to rotate the photo counterclockwise 90  
degrees.  
5. Sweep across the screen to display the next or  
previous photo or video. (Videos are indicated by the  
Play button.) The current photo or video is  
outlined in the thumbnails at the bottom of the screen.  
Touch a thumbnail to view the photo or video it  
represents.  
• Rotate right: Allows you to rotate the photo clockwise 90  
degrees.  
• Crop: Allows you to crop the image. Touch and drag the crop  
box or the sides or corners of the crop box to create the crop  
area, then touch Done. Touch to stop without cropping the  
X
6. Touch  
Share to use Group Cast (photos), S Note  
photo.  
(photos), ChatON, Dropbox, Picasa (photos), Google+,  
Bluetooth, Wi-Fi Direct, YouTube (videos), Gmail, or  
Email to share the photo or video.  
• Edit: Use Photo studio or Video maker to edit your photo or  
video.  
7. To delete the photo or video being displayed, touch  
Delete and then touch Delete to delete the item or  
Cancel to exit.  
• Set picture as: Assign the photo as a Contact photo, Lock  
Screen, or Wallpaper.  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
130  
   
• Buddy photo share: Detect the face in this picture and email  
that person.  
Note: Photos are stored in the /Root/sdcard/DCIM/Camera  
• Print: Print the current photo to a Samsung printer.  
• Show on map: This option displays if a Location exists for the  
photo. A Location is added to the photo if GPS tag is set On in  
the Camera settings. Touch this option to open the Map app  
and display the Location where the photo was taken. For more  
There is only two options for videos that are not  
playing:  
• Rename: Enter an new file name.  
• Details: Provides details about the video such as Title, Time,  
Duration, File Size, and so on. Touch the Close to close the  
pop-up.  
Caution! Be aware that your location may be present on a  
photo when posting your photos on the internet.  
For menu options while a video is playing and other  
• Rename: Enter an new file name.  
• Scan for nearby devices: Discover and connect directly to  
nearby devices.  
Note: Videos are stored in the /Root/sdcard/DCIM/Camera  
• Details: Provides details about the photo such as Title, Time,  
Location, Width, Height, File Size, and so on. Touch the Close  
to close the pop-up.  
10. Press  
Back to return to the category screen.  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Setting a Picture As  
You can use the photos you take as a contact’s photo or as  
Tip: To change wallpaper, see “Wallpapers” on page 38.  
wallpaper for the Home or Lock screen:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Playing Videos  
Apps  
Gallery.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gallery.  
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then  
2. Touch a category and then a group to view it, and then  
touch a photo to select it.  
touch a video thumbnail to play the video.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Set picture as.  
Note: Videos are marked with a  
Play button.  
4. Touch Contact photo and then touch a contact entry.  
– or –  
3. Touch  
Pause to pause the video.  
Touch Home and lock screens  
or Lock screen wallpaper  
The Crop picture screen displays.  
,
Home screen wallpaper,  
4. Touch  
Resume to resume playing the video.  
.
5. Touch and drag the  
white dot on the progress  
bar to fast forward or rewind the video. Touch the left  
end of the progress bar to restart the video. Touch the  
right end of the progress bar to end the video playback.  
– or –  
5. Touch and drag the crop box or the sides or corners of  
the crop box to create the crop area, then touch Done  
to save the cropped photo as the contact’s icon or  
wallpaper. Touch Cancel to stop without cropping the  
photo.  
Touch  
Rewind to restart the video or  
Fast Forward to end the video.  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
132  
   
can also perform Google searches, share images on  
Facebook, and sync files to Adobe Creative Cloud from within  
the application. Files saved to the Adobe Creative Cloud can  
be open in Photoshop on a PC or Mac.  
Sharing Photos and Videos  
Share photos and videos with your friends.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gallery.  
2. Touch a category and then a group to display  
thumbnails.  
Tip: A shortcut to PS Touch displays on the main Home screen  
by default.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Select item.  
4. Touch one or more photos and videos to highlight them  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
PS Touch.  
for sharing.  
– or –  
5. Touch  
6. Touch Group Cast (photos only), S Note (photos only),  
ChatON Dropbox Picasa (photos only), Google+  
Bluetooth Wi-Fi Direct YouTube (videos only), Gmail, or  
Email, then follow the prompts.  
Share.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
PS Touch.  
,
,
,
2. Read the End User License Agreement and Online  
Privacy Policy and touch Accept to continue or Decline  
to exit.  
,
,
PS Touch  
3. Touch Begin a Tutorial and then touch one of the  
tutorials to learn about the indicated topic.  
– or –  
Adobe® Photoshop® Touch lets you quickly combine images,  
apply professional effects, share the results with friends and  
family through social networking sites like Facebook, and  
more.  
Touch Begin a Project to start using PS Touch.  
Use PS Touch to work with core Photoshop tools designed for  
your device. Use your device camera to capture an image  
and then select part of the image to extract by scribbling. You  
Tip: Touch  
Settings  
Preferences  
Screen Tips  
Reset  
to enable screen tips.  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. To rent or buy media, you must have a Samsung  
account. Touch Menu My Profile to sign in to  
Media Hub  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie  
and TV content. With hundreds of titles available at your  
fingertips, entertaining on the go has never been easier. You  
can rent or purchase your favorite content and conveniently  
watch anywhere. Featuring the stunning viewing quality  
Samsung is known for, Samsung Media Hub is your gateway  
to mobile video like you have never experienced it before.  
your Samsung account or to create an account. Follow  
the prompts to complete log-in.  
4. Browse content using these options:  
• What’s new: Recently-added titles for rent or purchase.  
• Movies: Movies you can rent or purchase.  
• TV Shows: TV shows you can rent or purchase.  
• My Media: Content you have previously purchased or rented.  
5. When you find media you want to view, use these  
options:  
Tip: A shortcut to Media Hub displays on the main Home  
screen by default.  
• View trailer: View a short clip from the movie or show.  
• Buy: Purchase the media for unlimited viewing on your device.  
Follow the prompts to enter payment details.  
Note: Media Hub service requires a Samsung account and  
depends on service availability.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Media Hub  
Apps  
• Rent: Purchase a time-limited download of the media. Follow  
the prompts to enter payment details.  
.
2. Read the End-User License Agreement (EULA), touch  
I agree to the Terms and Conditions, and then touch  
Accept to continue or Decline to exit.  
6. For additional information about Media Hub, touch  
Menu  
Help.  
The Media Hub screen displays.  
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
134  
   
Your Media Content may pause/stop or not download in networks  
where there is a weak signal.  
Media Hub Notices  
Any media item (Media Content) may be rented or purchased after  
you create an account in Media Hub.  
You may begin watching downloaded Media Content as soon as  
a) license acquisition has occurred and b) sufficient amount of the  
Media Content has been buffered.  
Media Content that is downloaded may be viewed concurrently on  
up to five (5) devices with Media Hub that are also registered to  
the same account.  
You must finish watching rented Media Content within 24  
consecutive hours of start of playback.  
You may choose to remove a device from your account no more  
than once every 90 days.  
Stopping, pausing, or restarting rented Media Content does not  
extend the available viewing time.  
You may remove Media Content from a device as many times as  
you like. You will have the ability to re-download the Media  
Content at a later point in time subject to content re-download  
availability and studio permissions.  
In no event will rented Media Content be available for a period  
of more than thirty (30) days (or shorter on a title-by-title basis)  
after the Media Content has been rented (e.g., if you begin  
viewing rented Media Content on the 29th day after the rental  
transaction, but do not finish viewing the entire title, that rented  
Media Content may not be available for the entire twenty-four  
(24) consecutive hour period if such period would extend the  
viewable time beyond the thirty (30) day rental window).  
You MUST be in network coverage to license Media Content you  
have acquired through the Service.  
You can use 3G, 4G, or Wi-Fi connectivity in order to download  
Media Content.  
You cannot play any media content downloaded from Media Hub  
through any output on your mobile device, including All Share.  
Unlike purchased Media Content, rented Media Content will be  
viewable on only 1 device in your account.  
Media Content is downloaded and saved onto the SD card.  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Video Maker  
Video Maker lets you custom-make your own videos. You can  
add themes, music, pictures, and other videos to your video.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Video maker  
2. Touch New Project  
3. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Apps  
.
.
Photos and Video  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
136  
 
Section 9: Connections  
Your device includes features to connect to the internet and  
to other devices by using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, or a USB cable.  
Finding Wi-Fi Networks  
You can have your device automatically notify you of  
Wi-Fi  
Wi-Fi is a wireless networking technology that provides  
access to local area networks. Use your device’s Wi-Fi  
feature to:  
Turning Wi-Fi On or Off  
Turn your device’s Wi-Fi service on or off. When you turn  
Wi-Fi service on, your device automatically searches for  
available, in-range WAPs (Wireless Access Points).  
Turning Wi-Fi On  
Access the internet for browsing or to send and receive email.  
Access your corporate network.  
Use hotspots provided by hotels or airports while traveling.  
1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar.  
Wi-Fi communication requires access to an existing Wireless  
Access Point (WAP). WAPs can be Open (unsecured, as with  
most hotspots) or Secured (requiring you to provide login  
credentials). Your device supports the 802.11 a/b/g/n Wi-Fi  
protocol.  
The Status Details displays.  
2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi On.  
Turning Wi-Fi Off  
1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar.  
Configuring Wi-Fi Settings  
For more information about configuring your device’s Wi-Fi  
The Status Details displays.  
2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi Off.  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Scanning and Connecting to a Wi-Fi Network  
When you turn on Wi-Fi, your device searches for available  
Wi-Fi connections, then displays them on screen.  
1. From any screen, touch the Time in the Status Bar.  
Note: Depending on the Security protocol used by the WAP,  
additional network information may be required, such as  
a Password.  
The Status Details displays.  
• Password: If the WAP is secured, enter the password or hex  
key.  
2. Touch Wi-Fi to turn Wi-Fi On. Your device automatically  
scans for available Wireless Access Points.  
4. Touch Save to save the settings.  
Wi-Fi Direct  
Wi-Fi Direct allows device-to-device connections so you can  
transfer large amounts of data over a Wi-Fi connection.  
3. When the scan is complete, touch a Wi-Fi network to  
connect. If the Wi-Fi network is open, your device  
automatically connects. If the Wi-Fi network is  
secured, enter the password at the prompt to connect.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings Wi-Fi Direct.  
Apps  
Settings  
Adding a Wi-Fi Network Manually  
2. Touch the OFF / ON icon  
to turn Wi-Fi Direct  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
on.  
Settings.  
2. Under Wireless and network, on the Wi-Fi tab, touch the  
OFF / ON icon to turn Wi-Fi on.  
Your device will begin to search for other devices  
enabled with Wi-Fi direct connections.  
3. Touch Add network, then enter network information:  
• Network SSID: Enter the name of the Wi-Fi Wireless Access  
Point (WAP).  
3. Touch the Wi-Fi Direct tab to display Available devices.  
4. Enable Wi-Fi Direct (similar to Steps 1 and 2) on the  
device to which you want to connect.  
• Security: Select the type of security used by the WAP.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
138  
         
5. Once the device you want to connect to is displayed,  
touch on it.  
2. Touch the Wi-Fi Direct option.  
The Wi-Fi Direct settings screen displays, Wi-Fi Direct  
is turned on, and your device scans for other devices.  
An Invitation to connect displays on the device to which  
you want to connect.  
3. Touch a connected device name. For example,  
Android_XXXX.  
6. On that device, touch Accept  
.
You have 30 seconds to touch Accept on the device to  
which you want to connect for the connection to be  
made.  
4. The other device displays a pop-up that indicates it is  
receiving the file.  
The file is transferred and can be found in My Files in  
the ShareViaWifi folder.  
Once connected, the other device will show as  
Connected in your list of Wi-Fi Direct devices and the  
icon will display at the bottom of your screen.  
Note: Depending on the other device model, the prompts and  
shared folder information may differ.  
Sharing Information with Connected Device  
To share videos, photos, or other information with the  
connected device, follow these steps:  
1. View the information that you want to share. For  
example, if you want to share a photo, find the photo in  
your camera viewer or My Files folder, then touch the  
Share, Share via, or Send via option.  
Bluetooth  
Bluetooth is a short-range wireless communications  
technology for exchanging information over a distance of  
about 30 feet.  
You do not need to line up the devices to send information  
with Bluetooth. If the devices are in range, you can exchange  
information between them, even if they are in different  
rooms.  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Settings  
Apps  
Configuring Bluetooth Settings  
Configure your device’s Bluetooth settings. For more  
.
2. On the Bluetooth tab, touch the OFF / ON icon  
to turn Bluetooth on.  
Turning Bluetooth On or Off  
To turn Bluetooth on or off:  
3. Enable the target device’s discoverable or visible  
mode.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Settings  
2. Under Wireless and network, on the Bluetooth tab,  
Apps  
4. Touch the Bluetooth tab and then touch Scan. Touch  
Stop at any time to stop scanning.  
.
5. From the list of found devices, touch the target device,  
then follow the prompts to complete the pairing:  
touch the OFF / ON icon  
off.  
to turn Bluetooth on or  
If the target device requires a PIN, enter a PIN for the target  
device and touch OK. When prompted, enter the PIN on the  
target device.  
Note: When Bluetooth is on, the Bluetooth icon  
displays in  
the Status Bar.  
If the device allows automatic or smart pairing, your device  
attempts to pair with the device automatically. Follow the  
prompts on your device and the target device to complete the  
pairing.  
Pairing with a Bluetooth Device  
Search for a Bluetooth device and pair with it, to exchange  
information between your device and the target device.  
Tip: After pairing, your device and the target device recognize  
each other and exchange information without having to  
enter a passcode or PIN.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
140  
       
Sharing Data with a Bluetooth Device  
To send data to a Bluetooth device:  
Receiving Data from a Bluetooth Device  
To receive data from a Bluetooth device:  
1. Select a file or item from an appropriate application.  
2. Select an option for sharing data with the Bluetooth  
feature.  
1. Turn Bluetooth on. For more information, refer to  
Note: To select the length of time that your device will be  
visible, select  
Menu  
Visible time-out.  
Note: The method for selecting an option may vary by data  
type.  
2. Pair with the Bluetooth device from which you want to  
3. Search for and pair with a Bluetooth device. For more  
A Bluetooth authorization request pop-up displays  
when a Bluetooth device sends data to your device.  
3. Select Accept to confirm that you are willing to receive  
data.  
A File received message displays.  
Received data is saved to the Bluetooth folder. If you receive  
a contact, it is saved to your contacts automatically.  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Uninstalling an App  
Managing Downloads  
Apps come pre-installed on your device and you can  
download additional apps from Google Play. If you decide to,  
you can uninstall apps you downloaded from Google Play and  
other sources.  
Files, apps, and other items you download in Internet, Gmail,  
Email, or in other ways, are stored on your tablet’s internal  
storage. You can use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or  
delete what you have downloaded.  
There are several ways to uninstall an app:  
To manage the demands on their networks or to help you  
avoid unexpected charges, some mobile networks place  
restrictions on the size of the files you can download. When  
you are connected to such networks, and you try to  
download an oversized-file, you are asked or required to  
delay downloading the file until the next time you are  
connected to a Wi-Fi network. At that time, the download  
resumes automatically. The Downloads app can also be used  
to view and manage these queued files.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Application manager  
2. Touch the Downloaded tab.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
3. Touch the app you want to uninstall.  
4. Touch the Uninstall button.  
A pop-up displays the message This application will be  
uninstalled.  
Downloaded files are stored in the Download directory in  
your tablet’s internal storage. You can view and copy files  
from this directory when connected to a computer with a  
USB cable.  
5. Touch OK to confirm you want to uninstall the app.  
You can also use Google Play to uninstall apps you  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
142  
     
To uninstall an app from the Apps screen:  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
2. Touch Menu Downloaded applications  
The Downloaded applications screen displays.  
To learn more about Samsung Kies and Samsung  
applications, browse featured applications and download  
.
.
.
Note: Samsung Kies works on both PC and Macintosh  
computers.  
3. Touch  
Menu  
Uninstall.  
A
appears on Apps that can be uninstalled.  
Connecting With Samsung Kies  
1. Install Samsung Kies software on your PC.  
4. Touch an app’s icon and then touch OK to uninstall and  
remove the app from your tablet.  
Warning! Close any running applications before connecting  
Note: You cannot uninstall the apps that are included with  
Android. You can only uninstall the apps you have  
downloaded.  
your device to a PC.  
2. Run Samsung Kies.  
3. From a Home screen, touch  
Settings  
4. Touch More settings  
Apps  
Kies Via Wi-Fi  
Samsung Kies is a software that enables you to update your  
device firmware, synchronize files, and transfer data to and  
from your device directly by connecting to the PC.  
.
Kies via Wi-Fi.  
Select the source of the Wi-Fi connection for Kies air.  
5. Follow the prompts from Kies to update your device  
firmware.  
Note: Some features will be supported through the System  
Updates feature in the future. For more information,  
6. Refer to Samsung Kies Help for more information.  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Formatting a Memory Card Using Your Computer  
Memory Card  
Consult your computer and/or memory card reader  
documentation for information about formatting memory  
cards.  
Your device supports removable microSD™ or microSDHC™  
memory cards for storing music, photos, videos, and files.  
Installing and Removing a Memory Card  
For more information about installing and removing a  
Synchronizing with Windows Media  
Player  
Ensure that Windows Media Player is installed on your PC.  
1. Attach your device to the computer with the USB cable.  
Your computer recognizes the connection and displays  
the AutoPlay screen.  
Important! To prevent damage to information stored on the  
memory card, always unmount the card before  
removing it from the device.  
2. Click the option to Sync digital media files to this device  
to synchronize music files.  
Formatting a Memory Card  
Formatting erases all content from the memory card and  
3. Select and drag the music files you want to the sync  
list and begin synchronizing.  
prepares it for use with your device.  
Formatting a Memory Card Using Your Device  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Storage  
2. After mounting the SD card, touch Format SD card  
Apps  
Settings  
4. When finished, exit Windows Media Player and  
disconnect the USB cable.  
.
.
3. Follow the prompts to confirm the formatting of the  
card.  
Connections  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
144  
           
3. Click the option to Open device to view files  
.
Connecting as a Mass Storage Device  
You should see a Card and a Tablet folder.  
You can connect your device to a PC as a removable disk and  
access the file directory. If you insert a memory card in the  
device, you can also access the files directory from the  
memory card by using the device as a memory card reader.  
4. Copy files from the PC to the memory card (Card  
folder).  
5. When finished, close the PC folder and disconnect the  
USB cable.  
Note: The file directory of the memory card displays as folder  
Card, separate from the internal memory, which is folder  
Tablet  
.
1. Insert a memory card into the device to transfer files  
from or to the memory card.  
2. Attach your device to the computer with the USB cable.  
Your computer recognizes the connection and displays  
the AutoPlay screen.  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Section 10: Applications and Widgets  
This section contains a description of each application that is  
available on the Apps screen, its function, and how to  
navigate through that particular application. If the application  
is already described in another section of this user manual,  
then a cross reference to that particular section is provided.  
Various widgets are also described.  
GPS Applications  
GPS applications allow you to achieve real-time, GPS-  
enabled, turn-by-turn navigation and to access local  
searches based on a variety of category parameters.  
To receive better GPS signals, avoid using your device in the  
following conditions:  
inside a building or between buildings  
in a tunnel or underground passage  
in poor weather  
Tip: To open applications quickly, add the icons of frequently-  
used applications to one of the Home screens. For details,  
around high-voltage or electromagnetic fields  
in a vehicle with tinted windows  
Update Available  
When you open an application that is preloaded on your  
device, an Update Available message may be displayed if  
there is a new version of the app available.  
Global GPS turn-by-turn navigation, mapping, and Point of  
Interest content is available for three continents, including  
North America (U.S., Canada, and Mexico), Western Europe,  
and China, where wireless coverage is available.  
Touch Upgrade to update the app or touch Not Now to  
open the app without updating.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
146  
           
Alarm  
Important! If you touch or cover the internal GPS antenna  
while using GPS services, it may impede the GPS  
signal resulting in the GPS services not working in  
an optimal manner. Refer to the following diagram  
to locate the approximate location of the internal  
GPS antenna.  
Set alarms for reminders or for wake-up times.  
Adding and Configuring Alarms  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Create alarm or touch an alarm that is  
already set.  
3. Touch fields to configure the alarm:  
• Set time: Set a time for the alarm to sound. Touch the buttons  
above or below the hour and minute, and above AM PM  
Apps  
Alarm.  
Location of Internal  
GPS Antenna  
/
.
• Alarm repeat: Choose days for the alarm to repeat. Alarm days  
are blue.  
• Repeat weekly: Set the alarm to repeat at the same time every  
week.  
• Alarm type: Set the alarm type: Melody, Vibration, or Vibration  
and melody.  
• Volume: Touch and drag the slider to set alarm volume.  
• Alarm tone: Choose a tone for the alarm.  
• Snooze: Enable or disable the snooze option for the alarm. If  
enabled, set the following options:  
Back view of device  
Interval: Set the snooze duration to 3, 5, 10, 15, or 30  
minutes.  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Snooze repeat: Set the snooze to repeat 1, 2, 3, 5, or 10  
times.  
Editing and Deleting Alarms  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Alarm.  
• Smart alarm: Activates simulated nature sounds prior to the  
main alarm. If enabled, set the following options:  
2. Touch and hold an alarm and then touch one of the  
following options:  
Interval: Set the duration to 3, 5, 10, 15, or 30 minutes.  
• Delete: Delete the alarm.  
Tone: Set the Smart alarm tone.  
• Name: Touch the field and use the keyboard to enter a name  
for the alarm.  
– or –  
4. Touch Done to save the alarm.  
The main Alarm screen displays showing the new or  
updated alarm.  
Touch  
to delete or touch Select all, and then touch Delete  
Turning Off an Alarm  
When the alarm sounds, to turn off the alarm:  
Touch and drag to the right.  
Delete, touch the existing alarms you want  
.
Activating Alarms  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Turn alarm on to activate the alarm. A gray  
alarm means the alarm is deactivated.  
Alarm.  
2. Touch  
Setting the Snooze Feature  
To activate the Snooze feature after an alarm sounds:  
3. Touch an alarm to change any of its settings and then  
Touch and slide  
to the left. Snooze must first be  
touch Done to save the updates.  
set in the alarm settings.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
148  
   
1.  
Connect to a Wi-Fi network. For more information, refer  
AllShare Play  
AllShare PlayTM allows your tablet to stream photos, music,  
and videos from its memory to other DLNA certifiedTM (Digital  
Living Network Alliance) devices. Your tablet can also play  
digital content streamed from other DLNA certified devices.  
2.  
From a Home screen, touch  
AllShare Play  
Apps  
.
Note:  
To view more information about DLNA certified products  
Note:  
If prompted, read the on-screen message about network  
charges and touch OK to continue.  
.
Configuring AllShare Play  
The AllShare Play Sign In screen displays.  
You must first connect both of your communicating devices  
to the same Wi-Fi and be using an active and registered  
Samsung account prior to using this application. For more  
3.  
4.  
Touch Sign in  
.
The Samsung account screen displays.  
Touch Create new account, if you have not set up a  
Samsung account, or touch Sign in, if you have already  
set up a Samsung account.  
Connect to Wi-Fi, configure AllShare Play settings to identify  
your device as a server, and set treatment of copied files.  
Important!  
The Samsung account manages the access  
information (username and password) to several  
applications, such as AllShare Play.  
The AllShare Play main screen displays.  
5.  
For more information, touch  
Menu  
FAQ.  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
3. Use the keyboard to enter a PIN code and touch Done  
.
Using Group Cast  
While using various applications, such as  
This process makes sure only desired recipients can  
view your shared image.  
Gallery, when  
you touch  
an option.  
Share to share a file, you see Group Cast as  
The AllShare Play - Group Cast screen displays and the  
device waits for other connected recipients to accept  
the connection and enter the PIN on their screens.  
Group Cast is an easy way to share files in real time with  
others who are on the same Wi-Fi network. Group Cast can  
be used when you want to share documents, images, music,  
and so on.  
4. Touch OK to start the group cast process while other  
users connect.  
You can use Group Cast for meetings, sales presentations,  
conferences, and classes. All you need is a Wi-Fi network  
that works with Group Cast, and most do.  
You can now interact and draw with the on-screen  
image, and users will instantaneously see the same  
gestures and also be able to interact.  
To share a file using Group Cast:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Navigate to the file you want to share and touch  
Share Group Cast  
Apps  
Gallery.  
Note: The newly altered image (with markups and comments)  
can not be saved, but you can take a screen shot of the  
current image and save it to your Clipboard. For more  
.
Note: After the initial Group Cast request, touch  
Group Cast instead of  
Share.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
150  
 
2. Enter the first number using the numeric keys.  
B&N Nook  
Use the Barnes & Noble Nook application to download books  
for reading right on your device.  
3. Enter the operation for your calculation by touching the  
+
(add),  
-
(subtract),  
×
(multiply), or  
÷
(divide) key.  
4. Enter the next number.  
Note: You must be registered with Barnes & Noble to use the  
5. To view the result, touch the  
=
(equals) key.  
B&N Nook application.  
6. Repeat Steps 3 through 5 as many times as required.  
7. Touch to clear the result.  
Tip: A shortcut to B&N Nook displays on a Home screen by  
8. For more advanced problems, rotate your device to  
default.  
landscape mode and use the advanced operators sin  
,
ln  
,
cos, log, tan, and so on, just as you would on a  
From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
B&N Nook  
.
pocket calculator.  
9. Touch and hold entries in the Calculator's display field  
to copy or cut the contents of the display.  
Copied to clipboard displays. Paste the copied value in  
another app.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
B&N Nook.  
Calculator  
The calculator provides the basic arithmetic functions to  
solve simple arithmetic problems and advanced operators to  
solve more complex problems.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Calculator  
Apps  
.
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Camera  
Contacts  
Take photos and record video with your device’s built in  
Camera.  
Store contact information for your friends, family and  
colleagues, to quickly access information or to send a  
Tip: A shortcut to Camera displays on a Home screen by  
From a Home screen, touch  
Contacts  
Apps  
default.  
.
Crayon Physics  
From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Camera.  
Crayon Physics Deluxe is a game that uses two-dimensional  
physics, including gravity, mass, kinetic energy, and transfer  
of momentum. The objective of the game is to guide a ball  
from a starting point so that it touches all of the stars placed  
on each level.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Camera.  
ChatON  
Use ChatON to send and receive instant messages from any  
device that has a mobile phone number.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Crayon physics  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to play the game.  
Apps  
.
Tip: A shortcut to ChatON displays on a Home screen by  
default.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
ChatON.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
152  
         
Downloads  
Dropbox  
Files, apps, and other items you download in Internet, Gmail,  
Email, or in other ways, are stored on your tablet’s internal  
storage. Use the Downloads app to view, reopen, or delete  
what you have downloaded.  
Dropbox provides access to your personal computer files  
directly from your device. It allows you to take your files with  
you when you are on the go, edit files in your Dropbox from  
your device, upload photos and videos to Dropbox, and share  
your selected files freely with family and friends.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Downloads  
2. Touch an item to open it.  
Apps  
.
The in-device application works together with a partner  
program placed on atarget computer using an active Internet  
connection.  
3. Touch headings for earlier downloads to view them.  
Dropbox creates a folder that automatically synchronizes its  
contents across all of your connected devices on your  
account. Update a file to your dropbox on your computer, and  
it is automatically updated to the same folder on your other  
devices.  
4. Touch items you want to send, to check them, and then  
touch  
Share. Touch an option to share the item.  
Options are: Bluetooth, ChatON, Dropbox, Email, Gmail,  
Google+, Group Cast, Picasa, S Note, Wi-Fi Direct, or  
YouTube (videos only).  
Download the Desktop Application  
1. Use your computer’s browser to navigate to:  
http://www.dropbox.com/.  
5. Touch items you want to delete, to check them, and  
then touch  
Delete.  
The items are deleted from your tablet.  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions to install this  
application on your target computer containing the  
desired files.  
6. Touch Sort by size or Sort by date, at the bottom of the  
Downloads pop-up, to switch back and forth.  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Important! The computer application must be installed on the  
computer containing the desired files and that  
Tip: To learn more about Dropbox, touch the Dropbox logo on  
the Log in screen to Watch a video about Dropbox.  
computer must have an active Internet connection.  
Dual Clock  
Display the time for two different locations.  
Note: It might be necessary to configure your router’s firewall  
settings to allow this application to gain access to the  
Internet.  
To add the Dual clock widget to a Home screen, see “Adding  
1. From a Home screen, locate the Dual clock widget.  
Accessing Dropbox On Your Device  
The Dual clock widget is actually two widgets. Each  
widget displays the time and a city name.  
Tip: A shortcut to Dropbox displays on a Home screen by  
2. Touch either widget to choose a different city than the  
default.  
one currently displayed.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Dropbox  
Apps  
.
Email  
– or –  
Send and receive email using popular email services. For  
From a Home screen, touch  
Dropbox.  
Tip: A shortcut to Email displays on a Home screen by default.  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
3. Touch an item to open it.  
From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Email  
.
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Email.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
154  
     
Gallery  
Google+  
Use Gallery to view, capture, and manage photos and videos.  
Share updates and see what is going on around you with  
Google+ for mobile.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gallery.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Google+.  
Game Hub  
Internet  
Access social and premium games. Join Game Hub to enjoy  
free games with your friends.  
Your device includes a full HTML Browser, to access the  
internet.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Game Hub  
A Disclaimer screen displays.  
2. Read the Disclaimer and touch Confirm  
3. Touch Menu to display the following options:  
Apps  
.
Tip: A shortcut to Internet displays on the main Home screen  
.
by default.  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Internet.  
• Uninstall: Touch this option to uninstall a previously installed  
game.  
• Legal notices: Displays Game Hub legal information.  
4. Touch a game and follow the on-screen instructions.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Internet.  
Gmail  
Send and receive email with Gmail, Google’s web-based  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Gmail.  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Latitude  
Media Hub  
Samsung Media Hub is your one stop for the hottest movie  
Use Google Latitude to locate your friends on a map and  
share or hide your location. For more information, refer to  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Latitude.  
Note: Media Hub service requires a Media Hub account and  
Maps  
depends on service availability.  
Use Google Maps to find your current location, get directions,  
and other location-based information. For more information,  
From a Home screen, touch  
Media Hub  
Apps  
.
Messenger  
Tip: A shortcut to Maps displays on the main Home screen by  
With Google Messenger, you can bring groups of friends  
together into a simple group conversation.  
default.  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Maps  
.
From a Home screen, touch  
Messenger  
Apps  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Maps  
.
.
Note: You must enable location services to use Maps. Some  
features require Standalone or Google location services.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
156  
             
Music Hub  
The Music Hub lets you purchase and download songs and  
albums.  
Note: You may have to touch one or more subfolders before  
you encounter files.  
3. Touch a file to launch it in the associated application, if  
the file is associated with an application.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Music Hub  
Apps  
4. While browsing files, use these controls:  
.
Music Player  
Up: Display a higher directory.  
Play music and other audio files that you copy from your computer.  
Search: Use the keyboard to enter a search  
term. The current folder is searched and  
results are displayed. Touch  
search field.  
X
to remove the  
From a Home screen, touch  
Music Player  
Apps  
.
My Files  
Display mode: Enable or disable thumbnails for  
each file.  
Find, view, and manage folders and files, such as music files,  
photo files, video files, and so on, stored on your tablet. If the  
file is associated with an application on your device, you can  
launch the file in the application.  
Root: Display the root directory.  
Add Folder: Add a new folder in the current  
folder.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
My Files  
Apps  
.
2. Touch a folder and scroll down or up until you locate a  
file.  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Netflix  
Mark files: Touch the box to the left of each file  
or next to the folder to select all files in the  
folder. Then touch send, copy, cut, or delete in  
the Application bar.  
Watch TV shows and movies, streaming from Netflix.  
Note: The Netflix application is part of your Netflix  
membership. For more information about membership  
.
5. To view a photo file:  
Touch the file.  
The Complete action using pop-up displays.  
Touch Gallery or PS Touch to use that app to open the photo.  
Tip: A shortcut to Netflix displays on a Home screen by default.  
6. To view a video file:  
From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Netflix.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Netflix.  
Touch the file.  
Places  
The Video player is launched and plays the video.  
Google Places uses your location to help you find nearby  
destinations, such as restaurants, bars, hotels, attractions,  
Navigation  
Use Google Navigation to find a destination and get walking  
or driving directions. For more information, refer to  
ATMs and gas stations, or you can enter a location. For more  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Places.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Navigation  
Apps  
.
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
158  
       
Play Books  
Google eBooks is a new way to discover, buy, and enjoy your  
favorite books online and offline.  
Play Music  
Play music and other audio files that you copy from your computer.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Play Books  
Apps  
From a Home screen, touch  
Play Music  
Apps  
.
.
Play Movies  
Play Store  
The Play Movies app is a new application for select Android  
devices. Any movie you rent from the Google Play™ Store  
can be downloaded for offline viewing through this  
application. In addition, the Play Movies app can be used to  
stream your Google Play™ movie rentals as well as play any  
of your personal videos stored on your tablet.  
Google Play Store provides access to downloadable  
applications and games to install on your device. It also  
allows you to provide feedback and comments about an  
application, or flag an application that might be incompatible  
with your device.  
Tip: A shortcut to Play Store displays on the main Home screen  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Play Movies  
Apps  
by default.  
.
2. For more information touch  
Menu  
Help.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
Play Store.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Play Store.  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
If you are not already logged in with your Google  
account, the Add a Google Account screen displays.  
Updates to Downloaded Apps  
You can check for new versions of applications by visiting the  
Google Play Store. Items that have a new version available  
Touch Existing, if you already have a Google account, or New  
to create a Google account.  
will say Update  
.
You can also select apps that you would like to be updated  
automatically. To do this:  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Installed Apps  
Play Store.  
2. The first time you open Play Store, read the Google  
Play™ Terms of Service, the Google Music Terms of  
Service, the Google Books Terms of Service, and the  
YouTube Rentals Terms of Service, then touch Accept to  
continue.  
.
3. Touch the Installed tab to list the Play Store apps  
installed on your device.  
Update is displayed is there is an update available for  
the app.  
3. To browse for items to install, touch Apps  
,
Games,  
Music Books, or Movies. Touch a tab, such as  
CATEGORIES, FEATURED, TOP PAID, or TOP FREE to  
refine your search.  
,
4. Touch Allow automatic updating on an app to enable  
automatic updating.  
5. Touch Open to open the app on your device.  
6. Touch Update to update the app on your device.  
4. To get help for using Google Play™, touch  
Help  
Menu  
.
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
160  
 
3. Touch  
Multiscreen to split and share the screen  
Polaris Office  
Polaris® Office Mobile for Android is a Microsoft Office  
compatible office suite. This application provides a central  
place for managing your documents online or offline.  
4. To get help for using Polaris Office, touch  
Menu  
Help  
User Guide.  
The application can also open Adobe PDF (Portable  
Document Format) files.  
PS Touch  
Adobe® Photoshop® Touch lets you quickly combine images,  
apply professional effects, share the results with friends and  
family through social networking sites like Facebook, and  
more.  
Tip: A shortcut to Polaris Office displays on a Home screen by  
default.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Polaris Office  
.
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Tip: A shortcut to PS Touch displays on the main Home screen  
Polaris Office.  
by default.  
2. Enter your Email information, if desired, and touch  
Register to complete the process.  
– or –  
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
PS Touch.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Touch Skip to ignore this registration.  
PS Touch.  
The main Polaris Office screen displays. Recent  
documents displays a list of recently opened  
documents.  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
S Note  
S Planner  
Use S Note to create notes with productivity tools that turn  
handwriting into typed text and correct drawn shapes, lines,  
and formulas to make them perfect.  
Your device includes a powerful planner to help you organize  
your schedules more conveniently and effectively. Learn to  
create and manage events and tasks, and set alarms to  
remind yourself of important events and tasks.  
Tip: A shortcut to S Note displays on the main Home screen by  
default.  
Tip: A shortcut to S Planner displays on the main Home screen  
by default.  
1. From the Home screen, touch  
S Note.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
S Planner.  
– or –  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
S Note.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
2. Touch Done to remove the Learn about application  
S Planner.  
pop-up.  
2. Touch a tab to choose a calendar view:  
Year: Display all twelve months of this year. Sweep across the  
years at the bottom of the screen to display another year.  
• Month: Display the current month. Touch a month and year at  
the bottom of the screen to display another month.  
• Week: Display the current week. Touch a week at the bottom of  
the screen to display another week.  
3. Touch  
Multiscreen to split and share the screen  
Tip: Touch  
Menu  
Tutorial from the main S Note screen  
to learn more about the application.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
162  
         
• Day: Display today’s schedule by hour. Touch day at the bottom  
of the screen to display another day.  
6. Touch  
Menu for these options:  
• Zoom in: In the Week and Day views, increase the size of the  
area being viewed.  
• List: Display only event and task names and dates for a  
selected year. Touch a year at the bottom of the screen to  
display another year. Touch a date to hide or show the event or  
task name.  
• Zoom out: In the Week and Day views, decrease the size of the  
area being viewed.  
• Go to: Use the Set date pop-up to enter a date and then touch  
Set to display that date on your calendar.  
Task: Display your list of tasks. Touch the sort field to change  
how your tasks are sorted. Tasks can be sorted by due date,  
priority, date, week, month, or group.  
• Delete: Delete events for the year, month, week, day, week,  
month, before today, or all events, depending on the S Planner  
view.  
3. Swipe left or right across the screen to view other days  
or other weeks. Swipe up or down the screen to view  
other events.  
• Sync: Manually synchronizes the calendar entries among all of  
your current accounts, for example, Gmail, Exchange, and so  
on.  
4. To find an event or task, touch  
Search.  
Use the on-screen keyboard to enter a search term.  
Possible events display as you type.  
• Settings: Customize the calendar. For more information, refer  
• Show controls / Hide controls: Show or hide a small month  
calendar and a list of events in landscape mode.  
7. Touch Today to return to the current date.  
Touch  
Touch an event to send, edit, or delete the event.  
5. Touch Add event / Add task and then touch Done to  
add a new event to your calendar. For more  
on the keyboard to remove it.  
information, refer to “Creating an Event or Task” on  
page 164.  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
8. Touch Calendars to configure which events to display.  
Touch Add account Add account to add  
Managing Events  
You can delete, send, and edit events on your mobile device:  
additional accounts from which calendar events can be  
synced.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
S Planner.  
2. Touch an event.  
Creating an Event or Task  
To create an event or task:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
A pop-up displays event information.  
3. Touch Delete and then touch OK to delete the event.  
Touch Menu Send via and then touch Bluetooth  
Dropbox Email, or Wi-Fi Direct to share the  
S Planner.  
,
2. Double-tap the date for which you want to enter an all  
ChatON  
,
,
day event or task.  
event.  
Touch the Add event or Add task tab.  
Touch Edit to update the event details.  
Touch the My calendar field and touch a calendar to which the  
even or task should be added.  
– or –  
Touch  
Options and then touch  
Edit  
Delete,  
Use the keyboard to enter the event or task name.  
Send, or  
.
– or –  
Touch the date for which you want to enter an event or  
task.  
Touch  
.
Touch the Add event or Add task tab.  
Enter the event or task information.  
3. Touch Save  
.
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
164  
 
• Hide declined events: Enable or disable display of events.  
• Lock time zone: Allows you to lock event times and dates  
based on your selected time zone, which is defined by the  
following field.  
Add Additional S Planner Accounts  
To add additional accounts:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Calendars Add account  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts and sync  
The Accounts and sync screen displays.  
S Planner  
.
• Select time zone: If Lock time zone is enabled, used this  
option to select a time zone to lock event times and dates.  
• Show week number: Show the week number to the left of  
each week in the Month view.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
• Calendars: Enable calendars for your various accounts.  
Event notification  
2. Touch Add account to display the Add account option.  
3. Touch an account type and enter your account  
information.  
• Set alerts & notifications: Touch to select, which allows you to  
set the Alert, Status bar notification, or Off.  
S Planner Settings  
To set up Calendar preferences:  
• Select ringtone: Choose a tone for calendar notifications.  
• Default reminder time: Set the default time for a notification  
before an event is to occur.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
2. Touch Menu Settings  
S Planner.  
.
• Notifications while screen is off: Enable or disable the display  
of notifications on the full screen while the screen is turned off.  
The following options display:  
View settings  
• First day of week: Choose a day to begin each week.  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sync settings  
Tip: Touch Do not show for 90 days to keep this screen from  
• Sync events/tasks: Displays the General sync settings. For  
displaying for 90 days.  
The S Suggest main screen displays.  
(Accounts): Touch an account and then touch the check  
box to enable or disable the calendar sync for that  
account.  
4. Sweep across the screen to see all entries in a  
category (such as, Recommended, Guys, Ladies,  
Business, and so on). Sweep up and down the screen  
to see all categories.  
S Suggest  
S Suggest recommends popular applications, when your  
device is connected to a Wi-Fi, that are guaranteed to be  
compatible with your device.  
Samsung Apps  
Connect to Samsung Apps and make your smart device even  
smarter. Simply and easily download an abundance of  
applications to your tablet such as games, news, reference,  
social networking, navigation, and more.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
S Suggest  
Apps  
.
The Country list of countries displays.  
Tip: A shortcut to Samsung Apps displays on the main Home  
2. Touch a country in the list (for example, United States)  
screen by default.  
and then touch OK  
.
From the Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Samsung Apps.  
The Terms and conditions display.  
3. Touch the Agree check box and then touch Agree  
.
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Samsung Apps.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
166  
       
Start Screensaver: Start the Screensaver video without waiting  
for automatic screen timeout.  
Screensaver  
When your tablet screen automatically times out, instead of a  
blank screen, enable the Galaxy Note Screensaver, which is  
actually an action-packed video tour of all the fantastic  
features that you will find on your Galaxy Tab.  
TIMEOUT OPTIONS  
Device Screen timeout: Set the length of delay between the last  
key press or screen touch and the automatic screen timeout. For  
From a Home screen, touch  
Screensaver  
Apps  
.
Search  
Search the internet using the GoogleTM search engine. For  
The Galaxy Note 10.1 Screensaver Settings screen  
displays.  
Screensaver Options  
The Screensaver options are:  
MAIN OPTIONS  
Tip: Google Search appears by default on all Home screens.  
From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Google.  
Enable Screensaver: Touch the check box to enable the  
Screensaver to play when your screen automatically times out.  
Enable Touch To Stop: Touch the check box to enable the touch  
to stop feature, which means you can touch anywhere on the  
screen to stop the Screensaver video once it starts playing.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Search.  
Tip: Touch  
Back to stop the Screensaver video even if  
Enable Touch To Stop is enabled.  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Peel® suggests Top Pick TV shows for you based on what  
you watch and like. Instead of a long, boring channel grid,  
Peel presents an easy-to-use mosaic of your favorite shows,  
filtered by type and genre in the order you like.  
Settings  
Configure your device to your preferences.  
Tip: A shortcut to Settings displays on a Home screen by  
Tip: A shortcut to Smart Remote displays on the main Home  
default.  
screen by default.  
From a Home screen, touch  
– or –  
Settings  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Smart Remote  
.
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings.  
Smart Remote  
.
Smart Remote  
The Samsung Disclaimer displays.  
Allows you to locate and watch programming on your tv and  
then control your entertainment system with gestures from  
the device.  
2. Touch Agree  
.
3. Touch Set Up Smart Remote Now: US & Canada  
.
4. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
For more information, go to: http://www.peel.com  
.
Talk  
Discover and control TV programming right from your device.  
Lose your remotes, once and for all. Quit scrolling those  
tiresome grid guides. See what you want, right at your own  
fingertips: your shows, your controls, your friends.  
Use Google Talk to chat with other Google Talk users.  
From a Home screen, touch Apps Talk.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
168  
             
Add bookmarks just as you would with a physical textbook, and  
so much more.  
Task Manager  
View and manage active applications on your device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Textbooks  
Apps  
.
From a Home screen, touch  
Task manager  
Mini App Tray  
A welcome screen displays with a six-step tour of the  
Kno Course Manager.  
.
The Task manager pop-up displays.  
– or –  
Step 1  
Touch Sign In to get started. Once you sign in to Kno, you can try  
books for free, download purchased books, and save your notes.  
Step 2  
Touch  
Navigation and then touch Task manager.  
Textbooks  
The KnoTM App is a digital eTextbook reader that provides a  
unique learning experience on tablet devices. You can read  
both eTextbooks and PDFs seamlessly with all the formatting  
designed by the author and publisher along with many  
special features.  
Touch Get Books to find your textbooks.  
Step 3  
Touch Add New Course to keep things organized.  
Step 4  
Use DropBox to bring your PDFs right into your Course Manager.  
Step 5  
The Kno App allows you to:  
Turn pages with swiping motions  
Highlight and save important passages  
Search the book for key terms  
Create sticky notes  
Touch and drag books to a course.  
Step 6  
Tap once on a textbook or document to open it. Tap twice for a  
preview.  
Write in a book with your finger or S Pen  
Touch Done to conclude the tour.  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
2. Touch  
Info for additional information:  
Video Player  
• About: Displays the version number and some information  
about Kno.  
View and manage videos stored on your tablet.  
• Help: Explains how to use the Textbooks app and how to report  
a problem.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Video Player  
Apps  
.
• Report a Problem: Lets you report a Textbook app problem.  
Touch Done once you have selected the problem type and  
entered any additional comments.  
World Clock  
View the date and time in any time zone.  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
World Clock  
Terms of Use: Displays the Kno Terms of Service agreement.  
• Contact us: Enter any feedback you would like to  
communicate to Kno and touch Submit. Or give Kno a call at  
the number that is displayed on the pop-up.  
.
A map of the world displays with the locations you  
have added flagged.  
2. Touch  
Add to add a city to display.  
Video Maker  
Video Maker lets you custom-make your own videos. You can  
add themes, music, pictures, and other videos to your video.  
A list of world cities displays in landscape mode.  
3. Scroll through the list and touch the city you want to  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Video maker  
2. Follow the on-screen instructions.  
Apps  
add.  
.
Tip: Touch the first letter of the city’s name, to the right of the  
list, to find the city more quickly.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
170  
           
– or –  
Yahoo! Finance  
In portrait or landscape mode, touch and turn the globe  
to locate a city and touch the city you want to add.  
Stay on top of the markets with the Yahoo! Finance app for  
Android devices. Get real-time quotes, follow the market, or  
check out a particular stock. View headline news, topstories,  
and videos from Tech Ticker. Yahoo! Finance lets you keep up  
with the market movers from your Android phone.  
A pop-up displays the city name, the current time and  
date there, and the GMT offset.  
4. Touch the  
5. Touch  
on the pop-up to add the city.  
To add the Yahoo! Finance widget to a Home screen, see  
Reorder to change the order of the cities.  
Touch the grid  
new position in the list. Touch Done to change the  
order.  
on an entry and drag the entry to a  
Adding Your First Stock  
To add your first stock:  
1. From a Home screen, touch the Yahoo! Finance widget.  
The Yahoo Finance Add screen displays.  
6. Touch  
Remove to delete entries. Touch the box to  
check the cities you want to delete (a green check  
mark displays), then touch Remove  
2. Type in a stock name.  
.
3. Touch the  
key on the keyboard to start the search  
7. Touch and hold an entry to remove it or to set the  
DST settings, which enable or disable Daylight Savings  
Time adjustments.  
and touch an entry in the list of stocks that is  
displayed.  
4. The Yahoo! Finance widget displays with information  
about the stock just added.  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
• Settings: Displays the following option:  
Managing Stocks  
Once you add a stock, there are additional Yahoo! Finance  
options you can use to add more stocks and set up how they  
are displayed and refreshed.  
1. From a Home screen, touch an entry in the Yahoo!  
Finance widget.  
Auto refresh: Choose a time interval for automatic refreshing  
of stock information. The choices are: None, Every 30 minutes,  
Every 1 hour, and Every 3 hours. When the setting is None,  
touch the refresh icon on the Yahoo! Finance widget to update  
stock information.  
Information about the stock displays.  
5. Under the My Stocks tab, touch a stock entry to display  
the full stock information screen.  
2. Touch  
Refresh to update the information.  
6. Touch the Major indices tab to display a summary of  
the performance of major groupings of stocks,  
classified by the exchange on which they trade.  
7. Touch the Currencies tab to display the currency  
exchange rate for various currencies.  
3. Touch  
Add to add another stock. For more  
information, refer to “Adding Your First Stock” on  
page 171.  
4. Touch  
Menu to display the following options:  
• Delete: Touch to delete the stock being displayed.  
• Change order: Displays your stocks list. Touch and drag stocks  
to change the order in which they are displayed.  
Additional Options  
There are more options available from the full stock  
information screen.  
• Search: Touch to search for a new stock.  
1. From a Home screen, touch the Yahoo! Finance widget.  
The full stock information screen for one of your stocks  
displays.  
Applications and Widgets  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
172  
2. If you have added more than one stock, touch a  
heading bar to display the full stock information screen  
for the stock.  
1. From a Home screen, touch the Yahoo! News widget.  
The first time you connect, the Select news by country  
screen displays.  
3. Near the center of the screen, touch 1d (1 day),  
5d (5 days), 1m (1 month), 3m (3 months),  
6m (6 months), or 1y (1 year) to view a stock  
performance graph for the requested period.  
4. At the bottom, right of the screen, touch Y! More  
Information to link to the Yahoo! Finance website.  
5. At the bottom of the screen, touch Quotes delayed to  
read about real-time exchange quotes and access  
other Yahoo! Finance online options, such as Top  
Stories and a currency converter.  
Touch a country and then touch Done  
.
Touch the Yahoo! News widget again.  
The Yahoo! News screen displays.  
2. Touch and swipe the tabs left or right to see all the  
categories such as Top Stories, Business,  
Entertainment, Sports, and so on.  
3. Touch a tab to view that category.  
4. Touch a news item to read the full story online.  
5. To refresh the news items, touch  
6. Touch Settings to personalize your Yahoo! News  
settings.  
Refresh.  
Yahoo! News  
Display current news and much more from Yahoo!  
YouTube  
View and upload YouTube videos, right from your device.  
To add the Yahoo! News widget to a Home screen, see  
From a Home screen, touch  
YouTube  
Apps  
.
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Section 11: Settings  
This section explains Settings for customizing your device.  
Wi-Fi  
Accessing Settings  
Your device supports Wi-Fi a/b/g/n. Use Wi-Fi settings to  
manage your device’s Wi-Fi connections.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
For more information about using your device’s Wi-Fi  
Settings.  
– or –  
Turning Wi-Fi On or Off  
From any screen, touch the Time in the System Bar,  
then touch Settings. For more information, refer to  
When you turn Wi-Fi service on, your device automatically  
searches for available, in-range Wireless Access Points  
(WAPs).  
The Settings screen displays.  
From any Home screen, touch the time, then touch  
Wi-Fi from the Quick Settings menu.  
The Settings Screen  
The Settings screen has tabs on the left side of the screen.  
Information related to the tabs displays on the right side of  
the screen. There are four major groups of settings: Wireless  
and network, Device, Personal, and System.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Wireless and Network  
Control your device’s wireless connections.  
Settings. On the Wi-Fi tab, touch the OFF / ON  
icon  
to turn Wi-Fi on or off.  
Settings  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Scan for Wi-Fi Networks  
Advanced Settings  
To make sure you have an accurate list of Wi-Fi networks.  
Set up and manage wireless access points.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Wi-Fi  
2. Touch  
The following options display:  
Apps  
Settings  
From a Home screen, touch  
Wi-Fi, and then touch Scan  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
Menu  
Advanced.  
Add Wi-Fi Network  
To open a dialog where you can add a Wi-Fi network by  
entering its Network SSID (the name it broadcasts), security  
type, and other properties:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Wi-Fi, and then touch Add network  
2. Use the keyboard to enter Network SSID  
• Network notification: Have your device alert you to new  
Wireless Access Points (WAPs). Touch Network notification to  
turn notifications On or Off. When enabled, a check mark  
appears in the check box.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
• Keep Wi-Fi on during sleep: Specify when to disconnect from  
Wi-Fi. Option are: Always, Only when plugged in, or Never.  
• MAC address: View your device’s MAC address, required  
when connecting to some secured networks (not configurable).  
• IP address: View your device’s IP address.  
3. Touch the Security field and then touch a security type.  
Note: Depending on the Security protocol used by the WAP,  
additional network information may be required, such as  
a Password.  
4. If necessary, touch Password and enter the password or  
hex key.  
5. Touch Save  
.
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Additional Bluetooth Settings  
When Bluetooth is on, additional settings are available.  
Bluetooth  
Use Bluetooth settings to manage Bluetooth connections, set  
your device’s name, and control your device’s visibility.  
Turning Bluetooth On or Off  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Bluetooth  
Apps  
Settings  
.
To turn your device’s Bluetooth service On or Off:  
2. Touch Scan to scan for nearby discoverable devices.  
After searching, touch a device to pair with it. For more  
From any Home screen, touch the time, then touch  
Bluetooth from the Quick Settings menu.  
3. Touch  
configure:  
Menu and select a Bluetooth setting to  
– or –  
• Device name: Your device’s default name displays on screen.  
Touch to change the device name. Available when Bluetooth is  
turned On.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Settings. On the Bluetooth tab, touch the  
OFF / ON icon to turn Bluetooth on or off.  
Apps  
• Visible time-out: Use this setting to control when to  
automatically turn off the Discoverable option: 2 minutes, 5  
minutes, 1 hour, or Never timeout.  
For more information about using Bluetooth to exchange  
information with other Bluetooth devices, see “Bluetooth” on  
• Received files: Show the list of files received by using  
Bluetooth.  
Settings  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Airplane Mode  
Data Usage  
Airplane mode allows you to use many of your tablet’s  
features, such as Camera, Games, and more, when you are  
in an airplane or in any other area where accessing data is  
prohibited.  
From this screen you can view the Wi-Fi or Ethernet data  
usage.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Data usage  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch the Data usage cycle drop-down menu and  
select a date.  
Important! When your tablet is in Airplane Mode, it cannot  
access online information or applications.  
The data usage displays as a visual (chart) and also  
displays a list of each application with a breakdown of  
data usage by application.  
From any Home screen, touch the time, then touch  
Airplane mode from the Quick Settings menu.  
Note: Data is measured by your device. Your service provider  
may account for data usage differently.  
– or –  
Press and hold the Power button then touch Airplane  
More Settings  
This tab displays additional wireless and network  
mode  
.
information.  
– or –  
From a Home screen, touch  
More settings  
Apps  
Settings  
From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
.
More settings  
Airplane mode and then touch OK to  
Options display for Airplane mode, Wi-Fi Direct,  
turn on Airplane mode. A check mark  
appears in  
AllShare Cast, VPN, Kies via Wi-Fi, and Nearby devices.  
the check box when Airplane mode is On.  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Wi-Fi Direct  
Note: The target device must also have Wi-Fi Direct service  
You can configure your device to connect directly with other  
Wi-Fi capable devices. This is an easy way to transfer data  
between devices. These devices must be enabled for Wi-Fi  
Direct communication. This connection is direct and not via a  
hot spot or WAP.  
active and running before it is detected by your device.  
The direct connection establishes.  
5. Touch OK when prompted to complete the connection.  
The status field displays “Connected” and your  
connected device is displayed in the Wi-Fi Direct  
devices listing.  
Note: Activating this feature will disconnect your current Wi-Fi  
network connection.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings Wi-Fi Direct.  
Apps  
Settings  
AllShare Cast  
To share your device’s screen with another device, enable  
AllShare Cast.  
2. Touch the OFF / ON icon  
to turn Wi-Fi Direct  
on.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Your device begins to search for other devices enabled  
with Wi-Fi direct connections.  
More settings AllShare Cast  
.
2. Touch the OFF / ON icon  
to turn AllShare Cast  
3. Touch the Wi-Fi Direct tab to display Available devices.  
4. When scanning is complete, touch a device name to  
begin the connection process to another Wi-Fi Direct  
compatible device.  
on.  
Settings  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
VPN  
4. Touch Save to save your VPN settings.  
The VPN settings menu allows you to set up and manage  
Virtual Private Networks (VPNs).  
Connecting To a VPN  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings VPN  
Apps  
Settings  
Settings  
Settings  
.
Important! Before you can use a VPN you must establish and  
2. Touch the VPN to which you want to connect.  
3. In the pop-up that opens, enter any requested  
credentials.  
configure one.  
Adding a VPN  
4. Touch Connect  
.
Before you add a VPN you must determine which VPN  
protocol to use: PPTP (Point-to-Point Tunneling Protocol),  
L2TP (Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol), L2TP/IPSec PSK (Pre-  
shared key based L2TP/IPSec), or L2TP/IPSec CRT  
(Certificate based L2TP/IPSec).  
Edit a VPN  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings VPN  
2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to edit.  
Apps  
.
Note: You must also set a screen unlock PIN or password  
before you can use credential storage. For more  
3. In the pop-up that opens, touch Edit network  
.
4. Make the desired VPN setting changes.  
5. Touch Save  
.
Delete a VPN  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings VPN  
2. Touch Add VPN network  
Apps  
Settings  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings VPN  
2. Touch and hold the VPN that you want to delete.  
3. In the pop-up that opens, touch Delete network  
Apps  
.
.
.
3. In the form that appears, fill in the information provided  
.
by your network administrator.  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. In the Advanced section, set the following options:  
• Shared contents: Select the content to share. Choices are:  
Videos, Photos, and Music.  
Kies via Wi-Fi  
Wi-Fi configuration and usage by Kies Air.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Settings  
2. Touch More settings  
Select the source of the Wi-Fi connection for Kies air.  
Nearby Devices  
Apps  
• Device name: Enter the name for your device. The default is  
the model number: GT-N8013.  
.
Kies via Wi-Fi.  
• Access control: This setting can be Allow all or Only allowed  
devices.  
• Allowed devices list: Indicate the devices accessible to your  
device.  
This option allows you to share your media files with nearby  
DLNA (Digital Living Network Alliance) enabled devices.  
• Not-allowed devices list: Indicate the devices not accessible  
to your device.  
Warning! If file sharing is enabled, other devices can access  
your data. Use the Wi-Fi network and this option with  
care.  
• Download to: Set whether to download data to USB storage or  
SD card.  
• Upload from other devices: If a nearby device attempts to  
upload data, this setting indicates the response. Options are:  
Always accept, Always ask, and Always reject.  
To configure this option:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
More settings Nearby devices  
2. Touch File sharing to turn File sharing on.  
Apps  
.
Settings  
A check mark  
sharing is On.  
appears in the check box when File  
Settings  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Device  
Tip: You can also set System volume from the Home screen by  
This section of the Settings screen contains settings for your  
device.  
pressing the Volume Key.  
3. Touch OK to save your settings.  
Sound  
General  
Set the intensity of vibration for notifications and screen  
touch feedback.  
Set the volume level for all types of sounds.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Sound  
2. Touch Vibration intensity  
Apps  
Settings  
Note: You can only set volume when Silent Mode is disabled.  
.
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Sound Volume  
2. Touch and drag the sliders to set the volume for:  
• Music video games and other media: Sounds made by  
Apps  
Settings  
3. Touch and drag the Notification or Haptic feedback  
slider to set the vibration intensity.  
4. Touch OK to save your settings.  
Notifications  
.
,
,
,
music apps, video apps, and more.  
Select a default ringtone for message, alarm, and other  
notifications.  
• Notifications: Sounds for alerts to new messages and other  
events.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Sound Default notifications.  
Apps  
Settings  
• System: Application sounds and other sounds made by your  
device.  
2. Touch a ringtone to hear a sample and select it.  
3. Touch OK to save the setting.  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System  
3. Touch OK to save the setting.  
You can activate or deactivate both touch and screen lock  
sounds.  
Screen Timeout  
Set the length of delay between the last key press or screen  
touch and the automatic screen timeout (dim and lock).  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Sound  
Apps  
Settings  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
Apps  
Settings  
2. Touch Touch sounds or Screen lock sound (both default  
.
to On).  
2. Touch Screen timeout and select the screen delay time.  
The screen delays shutting off after inactivity for the  
selected period of time.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
3. Touch Haptic feedback to enable or disable vibration.  
When enabled, a check mark appears in the check  
Smart Stay  
Set the screen to stay on as long as you look at it.  
box. When Haptic feedback is enabled, the device  
vibrates to indicate screen touches and other  
interactions.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
2. Touch Smart stay  
A check mark  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
appears in the check box and the  
Display  
Brightness  
Smart stay pop-up displays more information.  
Set the default screen brightness.  
3. Touch OK to close the pop-up.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Note: When this option is enabled,  
displays in the Status  
Display  
2. Touch and drag the slider to set the brightness or touch  
Automatic brightness  
Brightness.  
Bar.  
.
Settings  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Auto-Rotate Screen  
Font Style and Size  
When this option is checked, the screen orientation changes  
when you rotate the device. When this option is not checked,  
the screen orientation locks in the current orientation  
(landscape or portrait) and the orientation does not change  
when you rotate the device.  
Set the font for screen displays and the size you want it to  
display.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Font style then touch a font or touch Get fonts  
online to browse and download a new font.  
3. Touch Font size and select a font size.  
Screen Mode  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
2. Touch Auto-rotate screen to enable or disable the  
auto-rotate feature  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
Set the screen mode.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
2. Touch Screen mode  
3. Touch Dynamic Standard, or Movie, and then touch OK  
Apps  
Settings  
Tip: Touch the Time in the System Bar to display the Quick  
Settings pop-up. Touch Screen rotation to enable or  
disable the auto-rotate feature. For more information,  
.
,
.
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Quick Launch  
Wallpaper  
The Quick Launch feature allows you to set multifunctional  
softkey to open applications.  
You can choose a picture to display on the Home Screen,  
Lock screen, or to both the Home and lock screens. Choose  
from preloaded wallpaper images or select a photo you have  
downloaded or taken with the Camera.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Display  
2. Touch Quick launch  
3. Touch None Screen capture  
Camera  
Apps  
Settings  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Wallpaper  
2. Touch Home screen  
screens  
The Select wallpaper from screen displays the  
following options: Gallery Live wallpapers, and  
Wallpapers  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
,
,
Applications, Search, or  
,
Lock screen, or Home and lock  
.
.
If you choose Screen capture, touch the softkey to  
capture an image of the current screen and edit the  
image. Touch and hold to capture and add an image of  
the current screen to the clipboard.  
,
.
The screen image is saved in the /Root/sdcard/  
Pictures/Screenshots folder. For more information,  
Settings  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Motion  
Power Saving  
When enabled, your device automatically analyzes the  
screen and adjusts the brightness to conserve battery power.  
It is possible to control certain aspects of your tablet by  
simply tilting it. You can tilt your tablet to reduce or enlarge  
the screen. You can move an icon from one Home page to  
another by panning your device to the left or right while  
holding the icon.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Power saving  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. On the Power saving tab, touch the OFF / ON icon  
to turn Power saving on or off.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Motion  
2. The following options are available:  
Apps  
Settings  
.
3. Turn Power saving on and touch the Power saving  
mode settings (CPU power saving Screen power saving,  
,
Touch the OFF / ON icon  
Touch Tilt to zoom Pan to move icon, or Pan to browse  
images  
Touch Sensitivity settings to set the sensitivity by dragging the  
slider between Slow and Fast  
to activate each option.  
Turn off haptic feedback) to enable or disable them.  
4. Touch Learn about power saving to display more  
information about saving power.  
,
.
Storage  
.
From this menu you can view the device memory or mount,  
unmount, or format an SD card.  
Touch Test to test your setting, OK to save your changes, or  
Cancel to stop without making the change.  
Device Memory  
Touch Learn about motions for more information.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Storage  
Apps  
Settings  
.
The Device memory displays as Total space, Apps,  
Pictures, videos, Audio, Downloads, Miscellaneous  
files, and Available space.  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SD Card  
4. Remove the SD card from the slot. For more  
Once a memory card has been installed in your device,  
the SD card memory displays as Total space and  
Available space.  
Note: Unmounting an SD card will stop some applications  
from functioning. Applications may not be available until  
you mount the SD card again.  
Mounting an SD Card  
1. Install an SD card. For more information, refer to  
2. From a Home screen, touch  
Storage  
Apps  
Settings  
Settings  
Formatting an SD Card  
.
When formatting an SD card you will want to backup your  
music and photo files that are stored on the card because  
formatting the SD card deletes all the stored data.  
3. Touch Mount SD card  
.
Unmounting an SD Card  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Storage  
Apps  
Settings  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Storage  
2. Touch Unmount SD card  
Apps  
.
.
2. Touch Format SD card and then touch Format SD card  
.
again on the warning screen.  
3. At the prompt, select OK to safely unmount the memory  
3. Touch Delete all  
.
card.  
Settings  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Battery  
Warning! Because this device can be configured with system  
software not provided by or supported by Google or  
any other company, end-users operate these devices  
at their own risk.  
See how much battery power is used for device activities.  
From a Home screen, touch  
Battery  
Apps  
Settings  
.
The battery level displays in percentage. The amount  
of time the battery was used also displays. Battery  
usage displays in percentages per application.  
Memory Usage  
See how memory is being used by Downloaded or Running  
applications.  
4. Touch Screen Android System, or Android OS to view  
,
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Application manager  
Apps  
Settings  
how the display, the Android system, and the Android  
OS are affecting battery use.  
.
2. Touch Downloaded or Running to display memory  
usage for that category of applications.  
Note: Other applications may be running that affect battery  
The graph at the bottom of the Downloaded tab shows  
used and free device memory. The graph at the bottom  
of the Running tab shows used and free RAM.  
use.  
Application Manager  
You can download and install applications from Google Play  
or create applications using the Android SDK and install them  
on your device. Use Application manager settings to manage  
applications.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Downloaded  
Displays apps you have downloaded onto your device.  
• Clear data: Clears application data from memory.  
• Clear cache: If the app stores data in a temporary area of the  
device's memory, and the amount of information stored is  
displayed, touch this button to clearing the temporary storage.  
• Clear defaults: If you have configured an app to launch  
certain file types by default, clear that setting.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Application manager  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Downloaded to view a list of all the downloaded  
applications on your device.  
3. To switch the order of the lists displayed in the  
• Permissions: Lists the kinds of information about your device  
and data to which the app has access.  
Downloaded tabs, touch Touch  
size or Sort by name  
Menu  
Sort by  
.
Running Services  
4. Touch an application to view and update information  
about the application, including memory usage, default  
settings, and permissions.  
View and control services running on your device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
Application manager  
Settings  
.
The following options are displayed:  
2. Touch the Running tab. All the applications that are  
currently running on the device display.  
• Force stop: Stops an app that is misbehaving. Restart your  
device if stopping an app, process, or service causes your  
device to stop working correctly.  
3. Touch Show cached processes to display all the cached  
processes that are running. Touch Show services in use  
to switch back.  
• Uninstall: Deletes the application from the tablet.  
Settings  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
4. Touch one of the applications to view application  
information.  
Adding an Account  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Accounts and sync  
2. Touch Add account  
3. Touch one of the account types.  
.
The following options display:  
.
• Stop: Stops the application from running on the device. This is  
usually done prior to uninstalling the application.  
4. Use the keyboard and follow the prompts to enter your  
Warning! Not all services can be stopped. Stopping services  
may have undesirable consequences on the  
application or Android System.  
credentials and set up the account.  
Tip: For more information about the types of accounts that you  
• Report: Report failure and other application information.  
Removing an Account  
Note: Options vary by application.  
Important! Removing an account also deletes all of its  
messages, contacts, and other data from the  
device.  
Personal  
This section of the Settings screen lets you manage the  
personal settings for your device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts and sync  
2. Touch an account to display its settings.  
3. Touch Remove account, then touch Remove account  
Apps  
Settings  
Accounts and Sync  
Set up and manage accounts, including your Google and  
email accounts.  
.
at the prompt to remove the account and delete all its  
messages, contacts, and other data.  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Synchronizing Account  
Select the items you want to synchronize on your account  
such as Books, Calendar, Contacts, and more.  
3. Touch Sync Now to synchronize all data for the selected  
account.  
– or –  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts and sync  
Apps  
Settings  
Under Data and synchronization, touch the account  
data to synchronize, such as, Calendar, Contacts,  
Email, and so on.  
.
2. Touch Sync all to synchronize all your accounts. Touch  
Cancel sync to stop the synchronization.  
Location Services  
3. On the Auto-sync field, touch the OFF / ON icon  
to turn Auto-sync on or off, which controls whether  
changes you make to information on your device or on  
the web are automatically synced with each other.  
Data and Synchronization  
You value your privacy. So, by default, your device only  
acquires your location when you allow it. To use  
Location-Based Services, you must first enable location  
services on your device.  
Use Wireless Networks  
To sync account information manually:  
Before you use applications such as Google Maps and find  
your location or search for places of interest, you must  
enable the Use wireless networks option or enable the GPS  
satellites.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts and sync  
2. Touch an account to display its settings.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Location services  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Use wireless networks to enable location  
information using the wireless network.  
Settings  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Use GPS Satellites  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
• Pattern: A screen unlock pattern is a touch gesture you create  
and use to unlock your device. Follow the prompts to create or  
change your screen unlock pattern.  
Apps  
Settings  
Location services.  
2. Touch Use GPS satellites to enable the GPS satellite.  
• PIN: Select a PIN to use for unlocking the screen.  
• Password: Create a password for unlocking the screen.  
• None: No pattern, PIN, or password is required.  
Location and Google Search  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Location services  
.
Note: Additional options are available only if you set Screen  
lock to display the lock screen (any setting other than  
Swipe or None).  
2. Touch Location and Google search to use your location  
data for improved Google Search results and other  
Google services.  
Security  
With Swipe Lock  
Screen Lock  
Display a lock screen that has to be swiped and then display  
a lock screen on which the face unlock, pattern, PIN, or  
password has to be entered.  
Choose settings for unlocking your screen. For more  
information about using the lock and unlock features, see  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
2. Touch the With swipe lock check box to activate or  
2. Touch Screen lock for these settings:  
deactivate the option.  
• Swipe: Swipe the screen to unlock it.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
• Face unlock: Look at your tablet to unlock it. Follow the  
on-screen instructions to set up Face unlock.  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Lock Screen Options  
Lock Automatically  
You can customize the Lock screen with the lock screen  
options.  
Use this option to set how quickly to lock the screen after the  
screen automatically turns off.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Lock automatically and touch an option.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
2. Touch Lock screen options and set the following  
options:  
Options are: Immediately; 5, 15, or 30 seconds; 1, 2, 5,  
10, or 30 minutes.  
• Shortcuts: Touch the OFF / ON icon  
to turn this  
option on or off. Touch Shortcuts to add up to four application  
shortcuts to the lock screen.  
Lock Instantly With Power Key  
Use this option to enable the lock screen when the power key  
is pressed. If this option is not enabled, the screen dims or  
brightens when the power key is pressed.  
• Information ticker: Set news or stock information ticker on the  
lock screen. This option requires a Wi-Fi connection.  
• Clock: Activate or deactivate the Lock screen clock. When  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Lock instantly with power key  
Apps  
Settings  
enabled, a check mark  
appears in the check box.  
to turn this option  
.
• Weather: Touch the OFF / ON icon  
.
on or off, which cause weather information to be displayed on  
the lock screen. This option requires a Wi-Fi connection.  
• Ripple effect: Shows a ripple effect on the lock screen. When  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
enabled, a check mark  
• Help text: Display help text on the lock screen. When enabled,  
a check mark appears in the check box.  
appears in the check box.  
Settings  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vibrate On Screen Tap  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Encryption  
Apps  
Settings  
To require a numeric PIN or password to decrypt your tablet  
each time you power it on or encrypt the data on your SD  
card each time it is connected:  
Security  
.
2. Touch Vibrate on screen tap  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
.
2. Touch Encrypt device. For more information, read the  
displayed help screen.  
Owner Information  
Use this option to enable or disable whether to show owner  
information on the lock screen.  
3. Touch Encrypt external SD card to enable the encryption  
on SD card data that requires a password be entered  
each time the microSD card is connected.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Owner information and then touch Show owner  
info on lock screen to enable or disable the option.  
3. Touch the text field and use the keyboard to enter the  
text to display on the lock screen.  
Tip: Make sure your battery is charged more than 80 percent.  
Encryption takes an hour or more.  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Find My Mobile  
Enable or Disable Remote Controls  
Use this option to allow your device to be locked and tracked,  
and for your data to be deleted remotely. You must sign up  
for both a Samsung account and a Google account to use  
Remote controls.  
Once you have signed in to your Samsung Account, you can  
enable or disable Remote controls.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security Remote controls.  
Apps  
Settings  
Sign In To Your Samsung Account  
If you have signed into your Samsung account, the  
Confirm password screen displays.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Enter your Samsung account password in the Enter password  
2. Touch Remote controls. Read the information and touch  
OK to acknowledge the information.  
3. Touch Add account to create a Samsung account first,  
then a Google account.  
field.  
Touch Done.  
The Introduction to remote controls screen displays.  
Touch Do not show for 90 days to temporarily disable this  
4. Touch Sign-up to create a Samsung account.  
– or –  
screen.  
2. Touch OK  
.
Touch Sign in, if you already have a Samsung account,  
enter your Email address and your Samsung account  
The Remote controls screen displays.  
If you have not signed into your Samsung account:  
password, and touch Sign in  
.
Touch Add account to sign in to your Samsung account. For  
For more information about Samsung accounts, see  
Settings  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. On the Remote controls screen, touch the OFF / ON icon  
in the upper right corner of the screen to turn  
Remote controls on or off.  
Device Administration  
To add or remove device administrators:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Device administrators  
Apps  
Settings  
Settings  
4. Touch Use wireless networks to enable location  
information using the wireless network.  
.
.
SamsungDive Web Page  
Enable or disable installation of non-Google Play  
applications.  
To launch the SamsungDive web page:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Unknown sources.  
An informational pop-up displays.  
Apps  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Security SamsungDive web page.  
2. Touch the Help tab to display more information about  
Remote Controls.  
Passwords  
3. Read the message and touch OK to allow installation of  
When enabled, password characters display briefly as you  
touch them while entering passwords.  
non-Google Play applications.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
.
2. Touch Make passwords visible to enable or disable brief  
Warning! Enabling this option causes your tablet and personal  
data to be more vulnerable to attack by applications  
from unknown sources.  
displays of password characters.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Credential Storage  
Trusted Credentials  
Caution! When you disable a system CA certificate, the Disable  
button changes to Enable, so you can enable the  
certificate again, if necessary. When you remove a  
user-installed CA certificate, it is permanently  
deleted and must be re-installed, if needed.  
If a certificate authority (CA) certificate gets compromised or  
for some other reason you do not trust it, you can disable or  
remove it.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
2. Touch Trusted credentials  
The trusted credentials screen has two tabs:  
Apps  
Settings  
.
5. Touch OK to return to the certificate list.  
.
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
Install from Device Storage  
• System: Displays CA certificates that are permanently installed  
in the ROM of your device.  
Install encrypted certificates from an installed memory card.  
• User: Displays any CA certificates that you installed, for  
example, in the process of installing a client certificate.  
3. Touch a CA certificate to examine its details.  
A scrolling screen displays the details.  
Note: You must have installed a memory card containing  
encrypted certificates to use this feature.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
.
4. Scroll to the bottom of the details screen and touch  
Disable to disable a System certificate or Remove to  
remove a User certificate.  
2. Touch Install from device storage, then choose a  
certificate and follow the prompts to install.  
Settings  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Clear Credentials  
Keyboards and Input Methods  
Set the keyboard used by your device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Clear stored credentials.  
Apps  
Settings  
Note: This setting only appears if you have installed encrypted  
Language and input  
.
certificates.  
2. Touch Default and select a keyboard.  
Samsung keyboard is the only selection available for  
this device.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Security  
Apps  
Settings  
.
3. Touch Configure input methods  
.
2. Touch Clear credentials to remove all certificates.  
4. Touch Google voice typing to automatically use Google  
Language and Input  
Language  
Set the language used by your device.  
voice typing.  
5. Touch  
next to Google voice typing, then touch  
Select input languages  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Select Automatic to use the local language or select a  
language from the list.  
Language and input Language.  
2. Touch a language / locale from the list.  
Touch Block offensive words to enable or disable blocking  
of recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-  
input Google searches.  
When enabled, a check mark  
appears in the check box.  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Samsung Keyboard  
To configure the Samsung keyboard:  
Auto-append: When enabled, the most common predicted  
word is automatically added to your text.  
Auto-substitution: When enabled, the system automatically  
replaces words you enter with words from the XT9 auto-  
substitution list.  
Touch  
next to Samsung keyboard to display the  
following options:  
• Input language: Used to set a default text entry language.  
Touch this field, scroll through the options, and touch the  
desired input language. When activated, a check appears in  
the box.  
Regional correction: When enabled, the system automatically  
changes the spelling of words based on norms for your locale.  
Recapture: When enabled, the system re-displays matching  
words when you make corrections to a word inserted by the  
system.  
• Predictive text: Enable or disable XT9 predictive text. When  
enabled the system suggests words matching your text entries,  
and, optionally, completes common words automatically. When  
XT9 is enabled, touch the Predictive text field to set the  
following options:  
My word list: Add words to your XT9 predictive text dictionary.  
Auto-substitution list: Manage the list of words the system  
uses for auto-substitution (Auto-substitution setting must be  
enabled).  
Word completion: Enable or disable automatic word  
completion for words matching your text entries.  
Word completion point: Choose the number of letters for the  
system to use to predict words for automatic completion.  
Spell correction: Enable or disable automatic spell checking  
and correction.  
• Handwriting: Touch to display the following options:  
Recognition time: Set the recognition time to 100, 300, 500,  
1000, or 2000 milliseconds.  
Pen thickness: Set the pen thickness to 1, 3, 5, 7, or 9 pixels.  
Pen color: Choose a pen color.  
Next word prediction: When enabled, the system predicts the  
next word based on common usage patterns.  
Recognition type: Set the recognition after each stroke or after  
completion.  
Settings  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Gesture guide: Displays examples of the various gestures that  
can be used to edit handwriting.  
Tutorial: Displays help for using the Samsung keyboard and  
XT9 predictive text.  
Tutorial: Help for using Handwriting recognition.  
About: Displays information about the handwriting software.  
• Reset settings: Reset keyboard settings except XT9 my words  
and auto-substitution.  
Speech  
• Voice input: Enable or disable the Voice input feature. When  
enabled, you can choose to enter text by speaking the words,  
using Google’s networked speech recognition feature.  
• Auto capitalization: Enable or disable auto-capitalization.  
When enabled, the system automatically capitalizes words in  
your text based on common usage, such as at the beginning of  
sentences.  
Set the speech settings for Voice search.  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
Language and input  
2. Touch Voice search to configure:  
• Language: Choose a language for your voice input.  
Settings  
.
• SafeSearch: Set the sensitivity for filtering of explicit images  
from the results of your voice-input Google searches.  
• Block offensive words: Enable or disable blocking of  
recognized offensive words from the results of your voice-input  
Google searches.  
• Auto-punctuate: Enable or disable automatic insertion of a  
“full stop” (period and space to end a sentence) by touching the  
space bar twice.  
• Character preview: Check to display an automatic preview of  
the current character selection within the text string. This is  
helpful when multiple characters are available within one key.  
• Key-tap vibration: Check to play a brief sound each time you  
touch a key on the on-screen keyboard.  
Voice output provides audible readout of text, for example,  
the contents of email messages.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Language and input  
Apps  
Settings  
.
• Key-tap sound: Check to play a brief sound each time you  
touch a key on the on-screen keyboard.  
2. Touch Text-to-speech output and select the preferred  
TTS engine.  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Touch  
configure.  
next to the preferred TTS engine and  
2. Touch Back up my data to enable or disable back up of  
application data, Wi-Fi passwords, and other settings  
to the Google server.  
4. Configure the following:  
• Speech rate: Set the speed at which the text is spoken.  
• Listen to an example: Play a sample of speech synthesis  
(available if voice data is installed).  
Backup Account  
If you have enabled the Back up my data option, then the  
Backup account option is available.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Back up and reset  
Apps  
Settings  
• Driving mode: New notifications are read aloud when enabled.  
Mouse/trackpad  
.
2. Touch Backup account and touch your Google Gmail  
account or touch Add account to set your Google Gmail  
account to be backed up to the Google server.  
This option sets your Pointer speed.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Language and input  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Automatic Restore  
2. Touch Pointer speed then drag the slide to the right to  
go faster or to the left to go slower.  
When enabled, backed-up settings are restored when you  
reinstall an application.  
3. Touch OK to save your setting.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Back up and reset  
Apps  
Settings  
Back Up and Reset  
Backup and Restore  
Back Up My Data  
.
2. Touch Automatic restore to enable or disable automatic  
restoration of settings from the Google server.  
Enable or disable backup of your information to the Google  
server.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Backup and reset  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Settings  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Personal Data  
Factory Data Reset  
System  
Pen  
Use Factory data reset to return your device to its factory  
defaults. This setting erases all data from the device,  
including Google or other email account settings, system and  
application data and settings, and downloaded applications,  
as well as your music, photos, videos, and other files. If you  
reset the tablet in this way, the next time you turn on your  
tablet you are prompted to reenter the same kind of  
information as when you first started Android.  
Hovering Pen Icon  
To set the Hovering pen icon:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Pen  
2. Touch Hovering pen icon  
When enabled, a check mark  
.
.
appears in the check  
box and, when the pen tip is near the screen, the  
hovering pen icon is shown on the screen.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Backup and reset  
2. Touch Factory data reset  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Pen Attach/Detach Sound  
.
To set the sound that is made when the pen is attached or  
detached from your tablet:  
The Factory data reset screen displays reset  
information.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Pen  
2. Touch Pen attach/detach sound  
3. Touch Off Sound1 Sound2, or Sound3  
If a sound is chosen, a sound example plays.  
Apps  
Settings  
3. Touch Reset device, then follow the prompts to perform  
.
the reset.  
.
,
,
.
Note: If you have set up your Samsung account, it has to be  
deleted before performing this function. For more  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Battery Saving  
Accessory  
Dock  
To extend battery life when the pen is attached:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Pen  
2. Touch Battery saving  
When enabled, a check mark  
Apps  
Settings  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Accessory  
.
.
2. Touch Dock sound  
.
appears in the check  
The tablet will not play sounds when inserting and  
removing the device from the dock when enabled.  
box and, when the pen is attached, your tablet does not  
try to detect it.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
Options After Detaching Pen  
To set the action that is taken when you detach the pen:  
HDMI  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Pen  
2. Touch Options after detaching pen  
A pop-up displays the following options: None,  
Apps  
Settings  
To set the HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) audio  
setting:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accessory  
2. Touch Audio output  
.
.
Apps  
Settings  
.
Shortcuts toolbar, S Note, S Planner, Crayon physics,  
PS Touch, Polaris Office.  
.
3. Touch Stereo or Surround to set the audio output  
setting.  
3. Touch an option.  
When you detach the pen, the selected action is  
performed.  
Settings  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Date and Time  
Accessibility  
Accessibility services are special features to make using the  
device easier for those with certain physical disabilities. Use  
the Accessibility settings to activate these services.  
By default, your device receives date and time information  
from the wireless network. When you are outside network  
coverage, you may want to set date and time information  
manually using the Date & time settings.  
Note: You can download accessibility applications from Google  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Date and time  
2. Configure the following settings:  
Apps  
Settings  
Play and manage their use here.  
.
System  
• Set date: Enter the current date (only available when the  
Automatic setting is disabled).  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accessibility  
2. Configure the following settings:  
Apps  
Settings  
.
• Set time: Enter the current time (only available when the  
Automatic setting is disabled).  
• Auto-rotate screen: Automatically rotates the screen from  
landscape to portrait orientation and vice versa.  
• Speak passwords: Speaks passwords to enter them.  
• Accessibility shortcut: Add a shortcut to Accessibility settings  
that displays when you press and hold the Power key.  
• Screen timeout: Select the screen delay time The screen  
delays shutting off after inactivity for the selected period of  
time. Options are: 15 or 30 seconds; or 1, 2, 5, 10, or 30  
minutes.  
• Select time zone: Choose your local time zone (only available  
when the Automatic setting is disabled).  
• Use 24-hour format: Set the format for time displays.  
• Select date format: Set the format for date displays.  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Lock automatically: Lock the screen after it automatically  
turns off. Options are: Immediately; 5, 15, or 30 seconds; or  
1, 2, 5, 10, or 30 minutes.  
Important! TalkBack can collect all of the text you enter,  
except passwords, including personal data and  
credit card numbers. It may also log your user  
interface interactions with the device.  
Note: The Lock automatically option only appears depending on  
Vision  
To install Web scripts:  
Services  
Enable or disable accessibility services.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accessibility  
2. Touch Install Web scripts  
Apps  
Settings  
.
Note: You must activate Accessibility before enabling services.  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accessibility  
2. Touch TalkBack to activate TalkBack.  
Apps  
Settings  
3. Touch Allow to allow applications to install scripts from  
.
Google that make their Web content more accessible.  
To set negative screen colors:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accessibility  
2. Touch Negative colors  
Apps  
Settings  
Note: TalkBack, when installed and enabled, speaks feedback  
.
to help blind and low-vision users.  
.
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
3. Touch the Gray box next to Settings to turn on TalkBack  
and select OK  
.
Settings  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
To set the font size:  
Mobility  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
This option allows you to set the Tap and hold delay time.  
Accessibility  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accessibility  
Apps  
Settings  
2. Touch Font size  
.
.
3. Touch a font size. Options are: Tiny, Small, Normal,  
2. Touch Tap and hold delay, and then touch a delay time.  
Large, and Huge.  
Options are: Short, Medium, and Long.  
Hearing  
Developer Options  
Set options for application development.  
USB Debugging  
When Mono audio is enabled, you can listen through one  
earphone to mono audio sound.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accessibility  
2. Touch Mono audio  
Apps  
Settings  
When enabled, allows debugging when the device is  
attached to a PC by a USB cable.  
.
.
Note: This setting is used for development purposes.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Developer options  
2. Touch USB debugging to enable or disable the setting.  
Apps  
Settings  
To turn off all sounds including receiver voice:  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
Accessibility  
2. Touch Turn off all sounds  
.
Settings  
.
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
.
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Development Device ID  
3. In the Settings screen, enter the current full backup  
password, the new password for full backups, then  
enter the new password again.  
The identification number for your tablet when using it as a  
development tool displays in this field.  
Allow Mock Locations  
4. Touch Set backup password to save the password  
change.  
This setting is used by developers when developing  
location-based applications.  
User Interface  
Configure the user interface by setting the behavior for the  
way the screen behaves when using applications or  
displaying data.  
Note: This setting is used for development purposes.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Developer options  
Apps  
Settings  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Developer options  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
2. Touch Allow mock locations to enable or disable the  
2. Touch the check box next to each option to enable:  
• Strict mode: Makes the screen flash when applications  
perform long operations on the main thread.  
setting.  
When enabled, a check mark  
box.  
appears in the check  
• Show pointer location: Highlights the data that was touched  
on the screen.  
Desktop Backup Password  
Protect the desktop with a backup password ID.  
1. From a Home screen, touch Apps  
Developer options  
2. Touch Desktop backup password  
• Show touches: Displays touch interactions on the screen.  
• Show screen updates: Areas of the screen flash when they  
update.  
Settings  
.
.
• Show CPU usage: Screen highlights the current CPU usage.  
• Force GPU rendering: Uses a 2D acceleration in applications.  
Settings  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
• Window animation scale: Configure the scale for animation  
(ranges from off to 10x).  
About Device  
View information about your device, including status, legal  
information, hardware and software versions, and battery  
use.  
Transition animation scale: Configure the scale for  
transitioning when using animation (ranges from off to 10x).  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
About device  
2. Touch items to view details:  
Apps  
Settings  
Apps  
.
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Apps  
Settings  
Developer options  
.
• Software update: Connect to the network and download new  
• Status: View Battery status, Battery level, IP address, Wi-Fi  
MAC address, Bluetooth address, Serial number, Up time, and  
Device status.  
2. Touch Do not keep activities to destroy every activity as  
soon as the application is closed.  
3. Touch Limit background processes to set the number of  
processes that can run in the background. Options are:  
Standard limit, No background processes, and 1 to 4  
processes at most.  
• Legal Information: Display Open source licenses Google  
,
legal, and License settings information.  
4. Touch Show all ANRs to display a prompt when  
applications running in the background are not  
responding.  
Tip: To find your device’s DivX® registration code and  
information about registering your device to play DivX  
®
protected video, touch License settings  
DivX VOD.  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
• Model number: Display your device’s model number.  
• Android version: Display the firmware version of your device.  
• Kernel version: Display the kernel version of your device.  
• Build number: Display your device’s build number.  
4. Touch variety of services to display information about  
Samsung services that are available.  
5. If you have no Samsung account:  
Touch Create new account.  
The Country list of countries displays.  
Touch a country in the list (for example, United States) and  
Software Update  
The Software Update feature enables you to use your device  
to connect to the network and download any new software  
directly to your device. The device automatically updates  
with the latest available software when you access this  
option.  
touch OK  
.
The Samsung account Terms and conditions screen displays.  
Touch Privacy policy to display the Samsung Privacy Policy.  
Touch I accept all the terms above and then touch Agree to  
continue or touch  
sync screen.  
Back to return to the Accounts and  
Signing In to your Samsung Account  
Before you can check for system updates, you must set up a  
– or –  
If you do have a Samsung account, touch Sign in  
The Samsung account screen displays.  
6. Use the keyboard to enter the required information and  
touch Sign up or Sign in  
.
After you sign into your Gmail account, you must also sign in  
to your Samsung account:  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
Accounts and sync  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
2. Touch  
Add account  
.
3. Touch  
Samsung account  
.
The Samsung account sign in screen displays.  
Settings  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
3. Touch the Select your country field and touch your  
country, if the correct country does not appear in the  
field.  
Tip: The password is for your Samsung account, not the  
password you use for the email address you are entering.  
Plus, you can use only letters, numbers, !, @, $, %, &, ^,  
and * for your Samsung account password.  
4. Touch Terms and conditions and Privacy policy, read the  
information, and touch Confirm  
.
The Accounts and sync screen displays with your  
Samsung Account listed under Manage accounts.  
Your device is connected to the server and a search is  
performed for a software update.  
Software Update Options  
Once you have signed into your Samsung account, you can  
check for a software update.  
1. From a Home screen, touch  
About device  
2. Touch Software update  
A Disclaimer screen displays.  
Apps  
Settings  
.
.
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Section 12: Health and Safety Information  
Do cell phones pose a health hazard?  
This section outlines the safety precautions associated with  
using your Galaxy Tab. The terms “GALAXY” or “mobile  
device” are used in this section to refer to your Galaxy Tab.  
Read this information before using your mobile device.  
Many people are concerned that cell phone radiation will  
cause cancer or other serious health hazards. The weight of  
scientific evidence has not linked cell phones with any health  
problems.  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals  
Cell phones emit low levels of Radio Frequency (RF) energy.  
Over the past 15 years, scientists have conducted hundreds  
of studies looking at the biological effects of the radio  
frequency energy emitted by cell phones. While some  
researchers have reported biological changes associated  
with RF energy, these studies have failed to be replicated.  
The majority of studies published have failed to show an  
association between exposure to radio frequency from a cell  
phone and health problems.  
Although GALAXY is not a cell phone, it can operate on the  
same network as cell phones and can use the same Radio  
Frequency (RF) signals to communicate with the network as  
a cell phone. Therefore, although the following information  
refers specifically to RF exposure from wireless phones, it  
may apply similarly to GALAXY when it is being used on a cell  
phone network.  
The U.S. Food and Drug Administration (FDA) has published  
information for consumers relating to Radio Frequency (RF)  
exposure from wireless phones. The FDA publication  
includes the following information:  
The low levels of RF cell phones emit while in use are in the  
microwave frequency range. They also emit RF at  
substantially reduced time intervals when in the stand-by  
mode. Whereas high levels of RF can produce health effects  
(by heating tissue), exposure to low level RF that does not  
produce heating effects causes no known adverse health  
effects.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
210  
         
The biological effects of radio frequency energy should not  
be confused with the effects from other types of  
electromagnetic energy.  
Research Results to Date: Is there a connection  
between RF and certain health problems?  
The results of most studies conducted to date say no. In  
addition, attempts to replicate and confirm the few studies  
that have shown a connection have failed.  
Very high levels of electromagnetic energy, such as is found  
in X-rays and gamma rays, can ionize biological tissues.  
Ionization is a process where electrons are stripped away  
from their normal locations in atoms and molecules. It can  
permanently damage biological tissues including DNA, the  
genetic material.  
The scientific community at large therefore believes that the  
weight of scientific evidence does not show an association  
between exposure to Radio Frequency (RF) from cell phones  
and adverse health outcomes. Still the scientific community  
has supported additional research to address gaps in  
knowledge. Some of these studies are described below.  
Interphone Study  
Interphone is a large international study designed to  
determine whether cell phones increase the risk of head and  
neck cancer. A report published in the International Journal  
of Epidemiology (June, 2010) compared cell phone usage for  
more than 5,000 people with brain tumors (glioma and  
meningioma) and a similar number of healthy controls.  
The energy levels associated with radio frequency energy,  
including both radio waves and microwaves, are not great  
enough to cause ionization of atoms and molecules.  
Therefore, RF energy is a type of non-ionizing radiation.  
Other types of non-ionizing radiation include visible light,  
infrared radiation (heat), and other forms of electromagnetic  
radiation with relatively low frequencies.  
While RF energy does not ionize particles, large amounts can  
increase body temperatures and cause tissue damage. Two  
areas of the body, the eyes and the testes, are particularly  
vulnerable to RF heating because there is relatively little  
blood flow in them to carry away excess heat.  
Results of this study did NOT show that cell phones caused  
brain cancer. In this study, most people had no increased risk  
of brain cancer from using cell phones. For people with the  
heaviest use of cell phones (an average of more than ½ hour  
per day, every day, for over 10 years) the study suggested a  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
slight increase in brain cancer. However, the authors  
determined that biases and errors prevented any conclusions  
being drawn from this data. Additional information about  
Interphone can be found at  
Risk of Brain Cancer from Exposure to Radio  
Frequency Fields in Childhood and Adolescence  
(MOBI-KIDS)  
MOBI-KIDS is an international study investigating the  
relationship between exposure to radio frequency energy  
from communication technologies including cell phones and  
brain cancer in young people. This is an international multi-  
center study involving 14 European and non-European  
countries. Additional information about MOBI-KIDS can be  
found at  
Interphone is the largest cell phone study to date, but it did  
not answer all questions about cell phone safety. Additional  
research is being conducted around the world, and the FDA  
continues to monitor developments in this field.  
International Cohort Study on Mobile Phone Users  
(COSMOS)  
The COSMOS study aims to conduct long-term health  
monitoring of a large group of people to determine if there  
are any health issues linked to long-term exposure to radio  
frequency energy from cell phone use. The COSMOS study  
will follow approximately 300,000 adult cell phone users in  
Europe for 20 to 30 years. Additional information about the  
COSMOS study can be found at  
Surveillance, Epidemiology, and End Results (SEER)  
Program of the National Cancer Institute  
The National Cancer Institute (NCI) actively follows cancer  
statistics in the United States to detect any change in rates of  
new cases for brain cancer. If cell phones play a role in risk  
for brain cancer, rates should go up, because heavy cell  
phone use has been common for quite some time in the U.S.  
Between 1987 and 2005, the overall age-adjusted incidence  
of brain cancer did not increase. Additional information about  
SEER can be found at  
.
.
Health and Safety Information  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cell Phone Industry Actions  
Reducing Exposure: Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories  
Although the existing scientific data do not justify FDA  
regulatory actions, the FDA has urged the cell phone industry  
to take a number of steps, including the following:  
Steps to Reduce Exposure to Radio Frequency Energy  
If there is a risk from being exposed to radio frequency  
energy (RF) from cell phones - and at this point we do not  
know that there is - it is probably very small. But, if you are  
concerned about avoiding even potential risks, you can take  
a few simple steps to minimize your RF exposure.  
Support-needed research on possible biological effects of RF  
for the type of signal emitted by cell phones;  
Design cell phones in a way that minimizes any RF exposure to  
the user; and  
Reduce the amount of time spent using your cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
your head and the cell phone.  
Cooperate in providing users of cell phones with the current  
information on cell phone use and human health concerns.  
The FDA also is working with voluntary standard-setting  
bodies such as the Institute of Electrical and Electronics  
Engineers (IEEE), the International Commission on Non-  
Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), and others to assure  
that safety standards continue to adequately protect the  
public.  
Hands-Free Kits  
Hands-free kits may include audio or Bluetooth® headsets  
and various types of body-worn accessories such as  
belt-clips and holsters. Combinations of these can be used to  
reduce RF energy absorption from cell phones.  
Headsets can substantially reduce exposure because the  
phone is held away from the head in the user's hand or in  
approved body-worn accessories. Cell phones marketed in  
the U.S. are required to meet RF exposure compliance  
requirements when used against the head and against the  
body.  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
hands-free kits reduce risks. Hands-free kits can be used for  
convenience and comfort. They are also required by law in  
many states if you want to use your phone while driving.  
Cell Phone Accessories that Claim to Shield the Head  
from RF Radiation  
Because there are no known risks from exposure to RF  
emissions from cell phones, there is no reason to believe that  
accessories which claim to shield the head from those  
emissions reduce risks. Some products that claim to shield  
the user from RF absorption use special phone cases, while  
others involve nothing more than a metallic accessory  
attached to the phone. Studies have shown that these  
products generally do not work as advertised. Unlike  
“hands-free” kits, these so-called “shields” may interfere  
with proper operation of the phone. The phone may be forced  
to boost its power to compensate, leading to an increase in  
RF absorption.  
Children and Cell Phones  
The scientific evidence does not show a danger to any users  
of cell phones from RF exposure, including children and  
teenagers. The steps adults can take to reduce RF exposure  
apply to children and teenagers as well.  
Reduce the amount of time spent on the cell phone;  
Use speaker mode or a headset to place more distance between  
the head and the cell phone.  
Some groups sponsored by other national governments have  
advised that children be discouraged from using cell phones  
at all. For example, The Stewart Report from the United  
Kingdom made such a recommendation in December 2000.  
In this report, a group of independent experts noted that no  
evidence exists that using a cell phone causes brain tumors  
or other ill effects. Their recommendation to limit cell phone  
use by children was strictly precautionary; it was not based  
on scientific evidence that any health hazard exists.  
Additional information on the safety of RF exposures from  
various sources can be obtained from the following  
organizations (updated 10/1/2010):  
FCC RF Safety Program:  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
214  
 
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA):  
Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA):  
(Note: This web address is case sensitive.)  
National Institute for Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH):  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information  
Your wireless mobile device is a radio transmitter and  
receiver. It is designed and manufactured not to exceed the  
exposure limits for Radio Frequency (RF) energy set by the  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) of the U.S.  
Government.  
These FCC RF exposure limits are derived from the  
recommendations of two expert organizations: the National  
Council on Radiation Protection and Measurement (NCRP)  
and the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers  
(IEEE). In both cases, the recommendations were developed  
by scientific and engineering experts drawn from industry,  
government, and academia after extensive reviews of the  
scientific literature related to the biological effects of RF  
energy.  
World Health Organization (WHO):  
International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection:  
Health Protection Agency:  
US Food and Drug Administration:  
http://www.fda.gov/Radiation-EmittingProducts/  
RadiationEmittingProductsandProcedures/  
The RF exposure limit set by the FCC for wireless mobile  
devices employs a unit of measurement known as the  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR). The SAR is a measure of the  
rate of absorption of RF energy by the human body  
expressed in units of watts per kilogram (W/kg). The FCC  
requires wireless devices to comply with a safety limit of 1.6  
watts per kilogram (1.6 W/kg).  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
The FCC SAR limit incorporates a substantial margin of safety  
to give additional protection to the public and to account for  
any variations in measurements.  
Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with  
FCC RF exposure guidelines. The FCC has granted an  
Equipment Authorization for this mobile device with all  
reported SAR levels evaluated as in compliance with the FCC  
RF exposure guidelines. The maximum SAR values for this  
model device as reported to the FCC is:  
SAR tests are conducted using standard operating positions  
accepted by the FCC with the mobile device transmitting at  
its highest certified power level in all tested frequency bands.  
Although the SAR is determined at the highest certified  
power level, the actual SAR level of the mobile device while  
operating can be well below the maximum reported value.  
This is because the mobile device is designed to operate at  
multiple power levels so as to use only the power required to  
reach the network. In general, the closer you are to a  
wireless base station antenna, the lower the power output of  
the mobile device.  
Body: 0.67 W/kg.  
SAR information on this and other model mobile devices can  
be accessed online on the FCC's website through http://  
transition.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/sar.html. To find information that  
pertains to a particular model mobile device, this site uses  
the mobile device FCC ID number, which is usually printed  
somewhere on the case of the mobile device.  
Once you have the FCC ID number for a particular mobile  
device, follow the instructions on the website and it should  
provide values for typical or maximum SAR for a particular  
mobile device. Additional SAR information can also be  
obtained at  
Before a new model mobile device is available for sale to the  
public, it must be tested and certified to the FCC that it does  
not exceed the SAR limit established by the FCC. Tests for  
each model mobile device are performed in positions and  
locations (e.g. near the body) as required by the FCC.  
For typical operations, this mobile device has been tested  
and meets FCC SAR guidelines.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
216  
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.  
FCC Part 15 Information to User  
Pursuant to part 15.21 of the FCC Rules, you are cautioned  
that changes or modifications not expressly approved by  
Samsung could void your authority to operate the device.  
Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.  
Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from  
that to which the receiver is connected.  
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.  
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This  
device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this  
device must accept any interference received, including  
interference that may cause undesired operation.  
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.  
Smart Practices While Driving  
On the Road - Off the Tablet  
The primary responsibility of every driver is the safe  
operation of his or her vehicle.  
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply  
with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part  
15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide  
reasonable protection against harmful interference in a  
residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and  
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and  
used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful  
interference to radio communications. However, there is no  
guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular  
installation. If this equipment does cause harmful  
Responsible drivers understand that no secondary task  
should be performed while driving whether it be eating,  
drinking, talking to passengers, or using a mobile device -  
unless the driver has assessed the driving conditions and is  
confident that the secondary task will not interfere with their  
primary responsibility. Do not engage in any activity while  
driving a moving vehicle which may cause you to take your  
eyes off the road or become so absorbed in the activity that  
your ability to concentrate on the act of driving becomes  
impaired. Samsung is committed to promoting responsible  
driving and giving drivers the tools they need to understand  
and address distractions.  
interference to radio or television reception, which can be  
determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is  
encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more  
of the following measures:  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Check the laws and regulations on the use of mobile devices  
and their accessories in the areas where you drive. Always  
obey them. The use of these devices may be prohibited or  
restricted in certain areas. For example, only hands-free use  
may be permitted in certain areas.  
Laws in some states may prohibit mounting this device on or  
near the windshield of an automobile. In other states, the law  
may permit mounting this device only in specific locations in  
the automobile. Be sure to consult the state and local laws or  
ordinances where you drive before mounting this device in  
an automobile. Failure to comply with these restrictions could  
result in fines, penalties, or other damages.  
Before using your device to chat with friends, consider your  
circumstances. Let the chat wait when driving conditions  
require. Remember, driving comes first, nothing else!  
Never mount this device in a manner that will obstruct the  
driver’s clear view of the street and traffic.  
If you consider a chat necessary and appropriate, follow  
these tips:  
Never use wireless data services such as Web browsing or  
e-mail while operating a vehicle.  
Use a hands-free device;  
Never watch videos, such as a movie or clip, or play video  
games while operating a vehicle.  
Secure your mobile device within easy reach;  
Chat when you are not moving;  
For more information, go to http://www.ctia.org  
.
Plan chats when your car will be stationary;  
Do not engage in stressful or emotional conversations;  
Let the person with whom you are speaking know that you are  
driving and will suspend the chat if necessary;  
Do not take notes or look up information while driving;  
Battery Use and Safety  
The battery in GALAXY is not intended to be replaced by the  
consumer. If you believe the battery is damaged or needs to  
be replaced, take the GALAXY to a service center for  
inspection and replacement.  
Notice regarding legal restrictions on mounting this device in  
an automobile:  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
218  
   
Do not let the GALAXY or battery come in contact with  
liquids. Liquids can get into the GALAXY’s circuits, leading to  
corrosion. Even when the GALAXY appears to be dry and appears  
to operate normally, the circuitry could slowly corrode and pose a  
safety hazard. If the GALAXY and/or battery get wet, have them  
checked by your service provider or contact Samsung, even if  
they appear to be working properly.  
Important! Use only Samsung-approved batteries, and  
recharge your battery only with  
Samsung-approved chargers which are  
specifically designed for your GALAXY.  
WARNING!  
Use of a non-Samsung-approved battery or charger may  
present a risk of fire, explosion, leakage, or other hazard  
Samsung's warranty does not cover damage to the GALAXY  
caused by non-Samsung-approved batteries and/or  
chargers.  
Do not place your battery in or near a heat source. Excessive  
heating can damage the GALAXY or the battery and could cause  
the GALAXY or the battery to explode. Do not dry a wet or damp  
battery with an appliance or heat source such as a microwave  
oven, hair dryer, iron, or radiator. Avoid leaving your GALAXY in  
your car in high temperatures.  
.
Do not use incompatible batteries and chargers. Some  
websites and second-hand dealers not associated with reputable  
manufacturers and carriers, might be selling incompatible or even  
counterfeit batteries and chargers. Consumers should purchase  
manufacturer or carrier-recommended products and accessories.  
If unsure about whether a replacement battery or charger is  
compatible, contact the manufacturer of the battery or charger.  
Misuse or use of incompatible batteries and charging  
devices could result in damage to the equipment and a  
possible risk of fire, explosion, or leakage, leading to serious  
Do not dispose of the GALAXY or the battery in a fire. The  
GALAXY or the battery may explode when overheated.  
Avoid dropping the GALAXY. Dropping the GALAXY, especially on  
a hard surface, can potentially cause damage to the GALAXY. If  
you suspect damage to the GALAXY or battery, take it to a service  
center for inspection.  
Never use any charger or battery that is damaged in any way.  
injuries, damages to your phone, or other serious hazard  
.
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FAILURE TO FOLLOW THE INSTRUCTIONS OUTLINED MAY  
LEAD TO SERIOUS PERSONAL INJURY AND POSSIBLE  
PROPERTY DAMAGE.  
Samsung Mobile Products and  
Recycling  
Samsung cares for the environment and encourages its  
customers to recycle Samsung mobile devices and genuine  
Samsung accessories.  
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS - SAVE THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
Proper disposal of your mobile device and its battery is not  
only important for safety, it benefits the environment.  
Batteries must be recycled or disposed of properly.  
DANGER - TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR  
ELECTRIC SHOCK, CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE  
INSTRUCTIONS.  
For more information about recycling your GALAXY, go to:  
1-800-822-8837 for more information.  
FOR CONNECTION TO A SUPPLY NOT IN NORTH  
AMERICA, USE AN ATTACHMENT PLUG ADAPTOR  
OF THE PROPER CONFIGURATION FOR THE  
POWER OUTLET.  
To find the nearest recycling location, go to:  
www.samsung.com/recyclingdirect or call 1-877-278-0799.  
THIS POWER UNIT IS INTENDED TO BE  
CORRECTLY ORIENTED IN A VERTICAL OR  
HORIZONTAL OR FLOOR MOUNT POSITION.  
Warning! Never dispose of batteries in a fire because they may  
explode.  
Display / Touch-Screen  
Please note the following information when using your  
mobile device:  
UL Certified Travel Charger  
The Travel Charger for this mobile device has met applicable  
UL safety requirements. Please adhere to the following safety  
instructions per UL guidelines:  
WARNING REGARDING DISPLAY  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
220  
           
The display on your mobile device is made of glass or  
acrylic and could break if your mobile device is  
dropped or if it receives significant impact. Do not use  
if screen is broken or cracked as this could cause  
injury to you.  
policy and the 2008 Federal Radio navigation Plan (FRP).  
Changes may affect the performance of location-based  
technology on your mobile device.  
Your Location  
Location-based information includes information that can be  
used to determine the approximate location of a mobile  
device. Mobile devices which are connected to a wireless  
network transmit location-based information. Additionally, if  
you use applications that require location-based information  
(e.g. driving directions), such applications transmit  
location-based information. The location-based information  
may be shared with third-parties, including your wireless  
service provider, applications providers, Samsung, and other  
third-parties providing services.  
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER: PROPER USE OF A  
TOUCH-SCREEN MOBILE DEVICE  
If your mobile device has a touch-screen display,  
please note that a touch-screen responds best to a  
light touch from the pad of your finger or a non-metallic  
stylus. Using excessive force or a metallic object when  
pressing on the touch-screen may damage the  
tempered glass surface and void the warranty. For  
more information, please refer to the “Standard  
Limited Warranty”.  
Navigation  
Maps, directions, and other navigation-data, including data  
relating to your current location, may contain inaccurate or  
incomplete data, and circumstances can and do change over  
time. In some areas, complete information may not be  
available. Therefore, you should always visually confirm that  
the navigational instructions are consistent with what you see  
GPS  
GALAXY can use a Global Positioning System (GPS) signal for  
location-based applications. A GPS uses satellites controlled  
by the U.S. Government that are subject to changes  
implemented in accordance with the Department of Defense  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
before following them. All users should pay attention to road  
conditions, closures, traffic, and all other factors that may  
impact safe driving or walking. Always obey posted road signs  
Emergency Communication  
If the mobile device does get wet, do not accelerate  
drying with the use of an oven, microwave, or dryer,  
because this may damage the mobile device and could  
cause a fire or explosion. Do not use the mobile device  
with a wet hand. Doing so may cause an electric shock to  
you or damage to the mobile device.  
.
GALAXY should not be relied upon for essential  
communications (medical emergencies, calls to 911, or  
communications to emergency services). GALAXY is not  
designed or intended to be used for such communications.  
Voice Over Internet Protocol (VOIP) services which may be  
used on GALAXY to make phone calls do not support 911  
calls and are only intended for talking with friends.  
Extreme heat or cold  
Avoid temperatures below 0°C / 32°F or above 45°C /  
113°F.  
Microwaves  
Do not try to dry your mobile device in a microwave oven.  
Doing so may cause a fire or explosion.  
Care and Maintenance  
Your mobile device is a product of superior design and  
craftsmanship and should be treated with care. The  
suggestions below will help you fulfill any warranty  
obligations and allow you to enjoy this product for many  
years:  
Dust and Dirt  
Do not expose your mobile device to dust, dirt, or sand.  
Cleaning solutions  
Do not use harsh chemicals, cleaning solvents, or strong  
detergents to clean the mobile device. Wipe it with a soft  
cloth slightly dampened in a mild soap-and-water  
solution.  
Keep your Samsung Mobile Device away from:  
Liquids of any kind  
Keep the mobile device dry. Precipitation, humidity, and  
liquids contain minerals that will corrode electronic  
circuits.  
Shock or vibration  
Do not drop, knock, or shake the mobile device. Rough  
handling can break internal circuit boards.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
222  
   
Paint  
hearing problem varies. Additionally, the amount of sound  
produced by a portable audio device varies depending on the  
nature of the sound, the device settings, and the headphones  
that are used. As a result, there is no single volume setting  
that is appropriate for everyone or for every combination of  
sound, settings, and equipment.  
Do not paint the mobile device. Paint can clog the  
device’s moving parts or ventilation openings and prevent  
proper operation.  
Responsible Listening  
You should follow some common sense recommendations  
when using any portable audio device:  
Caution! Avoid potential hearing loss  
.
Always turn the volume down before plugging the earphones into  
an audio source.  
Damage to hearing occurs when a person is exposed to loud  
sounds over time. The risk of hearing loss increases as  
sound is played louder and for longer durations.  
Set the volume in a quiet environment and select the lowest  
volume at which you can hear adequately.  
Prolonged exposure to loud sounds (including music) is the  
most common cause of preventable hearing loss. Some  
scientific research suggests that using portable audio  
devices, such as portable music players and cell phones, at  
high volume settings for long durations may lead to  
permanent noise-induced hearing loss. This includes the use  
of headphones (including headsets, earbuds, and Bluetooth®  
or other wireless devices).  
Be aware that you can adapt to higher volume settings over time,  
not realizing that the higher volume may be harmful to your  
hearing.  
When using headphones, turn the volume down if you cannot  
hear the people speaking near you or if the person sitting next to  
you can hear what you are listening to.  
Exposure to very loud sound has also been associated in  
some studies with tinnitus (a ringing in the ear),  
hypersensitivity to sound, and distorted hearing. Individual  
susceptibility to noise-induced hearing loss and potential  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Do not turn the volume up to block out noisy surroundings. If you  
choose to listen to your portable device in a noisy environment,  
use noise-cancelling headphones to block out background  
environmental noise. By blocking background environment noise,  
noise cancelling headphones should allow you to hear the music  
at lower volumes than when using earbuds.  
You can obtain additional information on this subject from the  
following sources:  
American Academy of Audiology  
11730 Plaza American Drive, Suite 300  
Reston, VA 20190  
Voice: (800) 222-2336  
Limit the amount of time you listen. As the volume increases, less  
time is required before you hearing could be affected.  
Avoid using headphones after exposure to extremely loud noises,  
such as rock concerts, that might cause temporary hearing loss.  
Temporary hearing loss might cause unsafe volumes to sound  
normal.  
Internet:  
National Institute on Deafness and Other  
Communication Disorders  
Do not listen at any volume that causes you discomfort. If you  
experience ringing in your ears, hear muffled speech, or  
experience any temporary hearing difficulty after listening to your  
portable audio device, discontinue use and consult your doctor.  
National Institutes of Health  
31 Center Drive, MSC 2320  
Bethesda, MD 20892-2320  
Internet:  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
224  
Using Your Mobile Device Near Other Electronic  
Devices  
National Institute for Occupational Safety  
and Health (NIOSH)  
Most modern electronic equipment is shielded from Radio  
Frequency (RF) signals. However, certain electronic  
equipment may not be shielded against the RF signals from  
your wireless mobile device. Consult the manufacturer to  
discuss alternatives.  
395 E Street, S.W., Suite 9200  
Patriots Plaza Building  
Washington, DC 20201  
Voice: 1-800-35-NIOSH  
(1-800-356-4674)  
1-800-CDC-INFO (1-800-232-4636)  
Outside the U.S. 513-533-8328  
Implantable Medical Devices  
A minimum separation of six (6) inches should be maintained  
between a handheld wireless mobile device and an  
implantable medical device, such as a pacemaker or  
implantable cardioverter defibrillator, to avoid potential  
interference with the device.  
Internet:  
http://www.cdc.gov/niosh/topics/noise/  
default.html  
Persons who have such devices:  
1-888-232-6348 TTY  
Should ALWAYS keep the mobile device more than six (6) inches  
from their implantable medical device when the mobile device is  
turned ON;  
Operating Environment  
Remember to follow any special regulations in force in any  
area, and always switch your mobile device off whenever it is  
forbidden to use it, or when it may cause interference or  
danger. When connecting the mobile device or any accessory  
to another device, read its user's guide for detailed safety  
instructions. Do not connect incompatible products.  
Should not carry the mobile device in a breast pocket;  
Should use the ear opposite the implantable medical device to  
minimize the potential for interference;  
Should turn the mobile device OFF immediately if there is any  
reason to suspect that interference is taking place;  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Should read and follow the directions from the manufacturer of  
your implantable medical device. If you have any questions about  
using your wireless mobile device with an implantable medical  
device, consult your health care provider.  
Posted Facilities  
Switch your mobile device off in any facility where posted  
notices require you to do so.  
Potentially Explosive Environments  
Switch your mobile device off when in any area with a  
potentially explosive atmosphere and obey all signs and  
instructions. Sparks in such areas could cause an explosion  
or fire resulting in bodily injury or even death. Users are  
advised to switch the mobile device off while at a refueling  
point (service station).  
For more information see: http://www.fcc.gov/oet/rfsafety/rf-  
.
Other Medical Devices  
If you use any other personal medical devices, consult the  
manufacturer of your device to determine if it is adequately  
shielded from external RF energy. Your physician may be able  
to assist you in obtaining this information. Switch your  
mobile device off in health care facilities when any  
regulations posted in these areas instruct you to do so.  
Hospitals or health care facilities may be using equipment  
that could be sensitive to external RF energy.  
Users are reminded of the need to observe restrictions on the  
use of radio equipment in fuel depots (fuel storage and  
distribution areas), chemical plants, or where blasting  
operations are in progress. Areas with a potentially explosive  
atmosphere are often, but not always, clearly marked. They  
include below deck on boats, chemical transfer or storage  
facilities, vehicles using liquefied petroleum gas (such as  
propane or butane), areas where the air contains chemicals  
or particles, such as grain, dust, or metal powders, and any  
other area where you would normally be advised to turn off  
your vehicle engine.  
Vehicles  
RF signals may affect improperly installed or inadequately  
shielded electronic systems in motor vehicles. Check with  
the manufacturer or its representative regarding your vehicle  
before using your mobile device in a motor vehicle. You  
should also consult the manufacturer of any equipment that  
has been added to your vehicle.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
226  
When your Device is Wet  
the National Fire Protection Standard (NFPA-58). For a copy  
of this standard, contact the National Fire Protection  
Association.  
Do not turn on your device if it is wet. If your device is  
already on, turn it off and remove the battery immediately (if  
the device will not turn off or you cannot remove the battery,  
leave it as-is). Then, dry the device with a towel and take it  
to a service center.  
Cautions  
Any changes or modifications to your mobile device not  
expressly approved in this document could void your  
warranty for this equipment and void your authority to  
operate this equipment. Only use approved batteries,  
antennas, and chargers.  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile Device  
Your mobile device is not a toy. Do not allow children to play  
with it because they could hurt themselves and others,  
damage the mobile device, or use services that increase your  
mobile device bill.  
The use of any unauthorized accessories may be dangerous  
and void the mobile device warranty if said accessories  
cause damage or a defect to the mobile device. Although  
your mobile device is quite sturdy, it is a complex piece of  
equipment and can be broken. Avoid dropping, hitting,  
bending, or sitting on it.  
Keep the mobile device and all its parts and accessories out  
of the reach of small children.  
FCC Notice and Cautions  
Other Important Safety Information  
FCC Notice  
Only qualified personnel should service the mobile device. Faulty  
service may be dangerous and may invalidate any warranty  
applicable to the device.  
The mobile device may cause TVor radio interference if used  
in close proximity to receiving equipment. The FCC can  
require you to stop using the mobile device if such  
interference cannot be eliminated. Vehicles using liquefied  
petroleum gas (such as propane or butane) must comply with  
Ensure that any mobile devices or related equipment used in your  
vehicle are securely mounted.  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Check regularly that all wireless mobile device equipment in your  
vehicle is mounted and operating properly.  
Failure to observe these instructions may lead to the suspension  
or denial of network services to the offender, or legal action, or  
both.  
When using a headset in dry environments, static electricity can  
build up in the headset and cause a small quick static electrical  
shock. To minimize the risk of electrostatic discharge from the  
headset avoid using the headset in extremely dry environments or  
touch a grounded unpainted metal object to discharge static  
electricity before inserting the headset.  
While using your device, leave some lights on in the room and do  
not hold the screen too close to your eyes.  
Seizures or blackouts can occur when you are exposed to flashing  
lights while watching videos or playing games for extended  
periods. If you feel any discomfort, stop using the device  
immediately.  
Do not store or carry flammable liquids, gases, or explosive  
materials in the same compartment as the mobile device, its  
parts, or accessories.  
Reduce risk of repetitive motion injuries. When you repetitively  
perform actions, such as pressing keys, drawing characters on a  
touch screen with your fingers, or playing games, you may  
experience occasional discomfort in your hands, neck, shoulders,  
or other parts of your body. When using your device for extended  
periods, hold the device with a relaxed grip, press the keys lightly,  
and take frequent breaks. If you continue to have discomfort  
during or after such use, stop use and see a physician.  
If your device has a camera flash or light, do not use the flash or  
light close to the eyes of people or pets. [122011]  
For vehicles equipped with an air bag, remember that an air bag  
inflates with great force. Do not place objects, including installed  
or portable wireless equipment near or in the area over the air  
bag or in the air bag deployment area. If wireless equipment is  
improperly installed and the air bag inflates, serious injury could  
result.  
Switch your mobile device off before boarding an aircraft. The use  
of wireless mobile devices in aircraft is illegal and may be  
dangerous to the aircraft's operation. Check with appropriate  
authorities before using any function of a mobile device while on  
an aircraft.  
Health and Safety Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
228  
Section 13: Warranty Information  
This Limited Warranty does not cover: (a) defects or damage  
resulting from accident, misuse, abnormal use, abnormal  
conditions, improper storage, exposure to liquid, moisture,  
dampness, sand or dirt, neglect, or unusual physical,  
electrical or electromechanical stress; (b) scratches, dents  
and cosmetic damage, unless caused by SAMSUNG;  
(c) defects or damage resulting from excessive force or use  
of a metallic object when pressing on a touch screen;  
(d) equipment that has the serial number or the  
Standard Limited Warranty  
What is covered and for how long?  
SAMSUNG ELECTRONICS AMERICA, INC. (“SAMSUNG”)  
warrants that SAMSUNG’s devices and accessories  
(“Products”) are free from defects in material and  
workmanship under normal use and service for the period  
commencing upon the date of purchase by the first  
consumer purchaser and continuing for the following  
specified period of time after that date:  
enhancement data code removed, defaced, damaged,  
altered or made illegible; (e) ordinary wear and tear;  
(f) defects or damage resulting from the use of Product in  
conjunction or connection with accessories, products, or  
ancillary/peripheral equipment not furnished or approved by  
SAMSUNG; (g) defects or damage resulting from improper  
testing, operation, maintenance, installation, service, or  
adjustment not furnished or approved by SAMSUNG;  
(h) defects or damage resulting from external causes such as  
collision with an object, fire, flooding, dirt, windstorm,  
lightning, earthquake, exposure to weather conditions, theft,  
blown fuse, or improper use of any electrical source;  
(i) defects or damage resulting from cellular signal reception  
Tablet  
1 Year  
1 Year  
Batteries (Including  
Internal Batteries)  
Case  
90 Days  
Other Tablet Accessories 1 Year  
What is not covered?  
This Limited Warranty is conditioned upon proper use of  
Product by Purchaser.  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
or transmission, or viruses or other software problems  
introduced into the Product; or (j) Product used or purchased  
outside the United States. This Limited Warranty covers  
batteries only if battery capacity falls below 80% of rated  
capacity or the battery leaks, and this Limited Warranty does  
not cover any battery if (i) the battery has been charged by a  
battery charger not specified or approved by SAMSUNG for  
charging the battery; (ii) any of the seals on the battery are  
broken or show evidence of tampering; or (iii) the battery has  
been used in equipment other than the SAMSUNG Tablet for  
which it is specified.  
equal to the remainder of the original Limited Warranty on  
the original Product or for ninety (90) days, whichever is  
longer. All replaced Products, parts, components, boards and  
equipment shall become the property of SAMSUNG. This  
Limited Warranty is extended to the Purchaser and is not  
transferable or assignable to any other person or entity.  
What must you do to obtain warranty service?  
To obtain service under this Limited Warranty, Purchaser  
must return the Product to an authorized Tablet service  
facility in an adequate container for shipping, accompanied  
by the sales receipt or comparable proof of sale showing the  
original date of purchase, the serial number of the Product  
and the seller's name and address.  
What are SAMSUNG's obligations?  
During the applicable warranty period, provided the Product  
is returned in accordance with the terms of this Limited  
Warranty, SAMSUNG will repair or replace the Product,  
without charge to Purchaser, or at SAMSUNG's sole option,  
refund the purchase price.  
To obtain assistance on where to deliver the Product, please  
call SAMSUNG Customer Care at 1-800-SAMSUNG. If  
SAMSUNG determines that any Product is not covered by this  
Limited Warranty, Purchaser must pay all parts, shipping,  
and labor charges for the repair or return of such Product.  
SAMSUNG may, at SAMSUNG's sole option, use rebuilt,  
reconditioned, or new parts or components when repairing  
any Product, or may replace Product with a rebuilt,  
reconditioned or new Product. Repaired/replaced cases will  
be warranted for a period of ninety (90) days. All other  
repaired/replaced Products will be warranted for a period  
Purchaser should keep a separate backup copy of any  
contents of the Product before delivering the Product to  
SAMSUNG for warranty service, as some or all of the  
contents may be deleted or reformatted during the course of  
warranty service.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
230  
What are the limits on SAMSUNG's liability?  
SAMSUNG MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS,  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, AS TO  
THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES, OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE  
OR SUITABILITY OF ANY THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE PRODUCT, OR  
THE ABILITY TO INTEGRATE ANY SUCH SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT WITH THE PRODUCT, WHETHER SUCH  
THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT IS INCLUDED WITH  
THE PRODUCT DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG OR OTHERWISE.  
RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE QUALITY, CAPABILITIES,  
OPERATIONS, PERFORMANCE AND SUITABILITY OF ANY  
SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR EQUIPMENT RESTS  
SOLELY WITH THE PURCHASER AND THE DIRECT VENDOR,  
OWNER OR SUPPLIER OF SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE OR  
EQUIPMENT.  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY SETS OUT THE FULL EXTENT OF  
SAMSUNG'S RESPONSIBILITIES, AND THE EXCLUSIVE  
REMEDY REGARDING THE PRODUCTS. ALL IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ARE LIMITED TO THE DURATION OF  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAMSUNG BE LIABLE FOR DAMAGES IN  
EXCESS OF THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT OR FOR,  
WITHOUT LIMITATION, COMMERCIAL LOSS OF ANY SORT;  
LOSS OF USE, TIME, DATA, REPUTATION, OPPORTUNITY,  
GOODWILL, PROFITS OR SAVINGS; INCONVENIENCE;  
INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE  
DAMAGES; OR DAMAGES ARISING FROM THE USE OR  
INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT. SOME STATES AND  
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG  
AN IMPLIED WARRANTY LASTS, OR THE DISCLAIMER OR  
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,  
SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS AND DISCLAIMERS MAY NOT  
APPLY TO YOU.  
Nothing in the Product instructions or information shall be  
construed to create an express warranty of any kind with  
respect to the Products. No agent, employee, dealer,  
representative or reseller is authorized to modify or extend  
this Limited Warranty or to make binding representations or  
claims, whether in advertising, presentations or otherwise,  
on behalf of SAMSUNG regarding the Products or this Limited  
Warranty.  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This Limited Warranty gives you specific legal rights, and you  
may also have other rights that vary from state to state.  
arbitrator shall decide all issues of interpretation and  
application of this arbitration provision and the Limited  
Warranty.  
What is the procedure for resolving disputes?  
For any arbitration in which your total damage claims,  
exclusive of attorney fees and expert witness fees, are  
$5,000.00 or less (“Small Claim”), the arbitrator may, if you  
prevail, award your reasonable attorney fees, expert witness  
fees and costs as part of any award, but may not grant  
SAMSUNG its attorney fees, expert witness fees or costs  
unless it is determined that the claim was brought in bad  
faith. In a Small Claim case, you shall be required to pay no  
more than half of the total administrative, facility and  
arbitrator fees, or $50.00 of such fees, whichever is less, and  
SAMSUNG shall pay the remainder of such fees.  
Administrative, facility and arbitrator fees for arbitrations in  
which your total damage claims, exclusive of attorney fees  
and expert witness fees, exceed $5,000.00 (“Large Claim”)  
shall be determined according to AAA rules. In a Large Claim  
case, the arbitrator may grant to the prevailing party, or  
apportion among the parties, reasonable attorney fees,  
expert witness fees and costs. Judgment may be entered on  
the arbitrator’s award in any court of competent jurisdiction.  
ALL DISPUTES WITH SAMSUNG ARISING IN ANY WAY FROM  
THIS LIMITED WARRANTY OR THE SALE, CONDITION OR  
PERFORMANCE OF THE PRODUCTS SHALL BE RESOLVED  
EXCLUSIVELY THROUGH FINAL AND BINDING ARBITRATION,  
AND NOT BY A COURT OR JURY.  
Any such dispute shall not be combined or consolidated with  
a dispute involving any other person's or entity's Product or  
claim, and specifically, without limitation of the foregoing,  
shall not under any circumstances proceed as part of a class  
action. The arbitration shall be conducted before a single  
arbitrator, whose award may not exceed, in form or amount,  
the relief allowed by the applicable law. The arbitration shall  
be conducted according to the American Arbitration  
Association (AAA) Commercial Arbitration Rules applicable to  
consumer disputes. This arbitration provision is entered  
pursuant to the Federal Arbitration Act. The laws of the State  
of Texas, without reference to its choice of laws principles,  
shall govern the interpretation of the Limited Warranty and all  
disputes that are subject to this arbitration provision. The  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
232  
This arbitration provision also applies to claims against  
SAMSUNG’s employees, representatives and affiliates if any  
such claim arises from the Product’s sale, condition or  
performance.  
out of this dispute resolution procedure will not affect the  
coverage of the Limited Warranty in any way, and you will  
continue to enjoy the benefits of the Limited Warranty.  
Severability  
You may opt out of this dispute resolution procedure by  
providing notice to SAMSUNG no later than 30 calendar days  
from the date of the first consumer purchaser’s purchase of the  
Product. To opt out, you must send notice by e-mail to  
If any portion of this Limited Warranty is held to be illegal or  
unenforceable, such partial illegality or unenforceability shall  
not affect the enforceability of the remainder of the Limited  
Warranty.  
[email protected], with the subject line: “Arbitration  
Opt Out.” You must include in the opt out e-mail (a) your name  
and address; (b) the date on which the Product was purchased;  
(c) the Product model name or model number; and (d) the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number, as applicable, if you have it (the IMEI  
or MEID or Serial Number can be found (i) on the Product box;  
(ii) on the Product information screen, which can be found  
under “Settings;” (iii) on a label on the back of the Product  
beneath the battery, if the battery is removable; and (iv) on the  
outside of the Product if the battery is not removable).  
Alternatively, you may opt out by calling 1-888-987-4357 no  
later than 30 calendar days from the date of the first consumer  
purchaser’s purchase of the Product and providing the same  
information. These are the only two forms of notice that will be  
effective to opt out of this dispute resolution procedure. Opting  
Precautions for Transfer and Disposal  
If data stored on this device is deleted or reformatted using  
the standard methods, the data only appears to be removed  
on a superficial level, and it may be possible for someone to  
retrieve and reuse the data by means of special software.  
To avoid unintended information leaks and other problems of  
this sort, it is recommended that the device be returned to  
Samsung’s Customer Care Center for an Extended File  
System (EFS) Clear which will eliminate all user memory and  
return all settings to default settings. Please contact the  
Samsung Customer Care Center for details.  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
party suppliers and licensors that accompanies this EULA,  
which includes computer software and may include  
associated media, printed materials, “online” or electronic  
documentation (“Software”).  
Important! Please provide warranty information (proof of  
purchase) to Samsung’s Customer Care Center in  
order to provide this service at no charge. If the  
warranty has expired on the device, charges may  
apply.  
BY CLICKING THE “I ACCEPT” BUTTON (OR IF YOU BYPASS  
OR OTHERWISE DISABLE THE “I ACCEPT”, AND STILL  
INSTALL, COPY, DOWNLOAD, ACCESS OR OTHERWISE USE  
THE SOFTWARE), YOU AGREE TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS  
OF THIS EULA. IF YOU DO NOT ACCEPT THE TERMS IN THIS  
EULA, YOU MUST CLICK THE “DECLINE” BUTTON, AND  
DISCONTINUE USE OF THE SOFTWARE.  
Samsung Electronics America, Inc.  
85 Challenger Road  
Ridgefield Park, New Jersey 07660  
Phone: 1-800-SAMSUNG  
©2012 Samsung Electronics America, Inc. All rights  
reserved.  
1. GRANT OF LICENSE. Samsung grants you the following  
rights provided that you comply with all terms and conditions  
of this EULA: You may install, use, access, display and run  
one copy of the Software on the local hard disk(s) or other  
permanent storage media of one computer and use the  
Software on a single computer or a mobile device at a time,  
and you may not make the Software available over a network  
where it could be used by multiple computers at the same  
time. You may make one copy of the Software in  
No reproduction in whole or in part allowed without prior  
written approval. Specifications and availability subject to  
change without notice. [111611]  
End User License Agreement for  
Software  
IMPORTANT. READ CAREFULLY: This End User License  
Agreement (“EULA”) is a legal agreement between you  
(either an individual or a single entity) and Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. for software owned by Samsung  
Electronics Co., Ltd. and its affiliated companies and its third  
machine-readable form for backup purposes only; provided  
that the backup copy must include all copyright or other  
proprietary notices contained on the original.  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
234  
 
2. RESERVATION OF RIGHTS AND OWNERSHIP. Samsung  
reserves all rights not expressly granted to you in this EULA.  
The Software is protected by copyright and other intellectual  
property laws and treaties. Samsung or its suppliers own the  
title, copyright and other intellectual property rights in the  
Software. The Software is licensed, not sold.  
5. UPGRADES. This EULA applies to updates, supplements  
and add-on components (if any) of the Software that  
Samsung may provide to you or make available to you after  
the date you obtain your initial copy of the Software, unless  
we provide other terms along with such upgrade. To use  
Software identified as an upgrade, you must first be licensed  
for the Software identified by Samsung as eligible for the  
upgrade. After upgrading, you may no longer use the  
Software that formed the basis for your upgrade eligibility.  
3. LIMITATIONS ON END USER RIGHTS. You may not reverse  
engineer, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise attempt to  
discover the source code or algorithms of, the Software  
(except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly  
permitted by applicable law not withstanding this limitation),  
or modify, or disable any features of, the Software, or create  
derivative works based on the Software. You may not rent,  
lease, lend, sublicense or provide commercial hosting  
services with the Software.  
6. SOFTWARE TRANSFER. You may not transfer this EULA or  
the rights to the Software granted herein to any third party  
unless it is in connection with the sale of the mobile device  
which the Software accompanied. In such event, the transfer  
must include all of the Software (including all component  
parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades, this  
EULA) and you may not retain any copies of the Software.  
The transfer may not be an indirect transfer, such as a  
consignment. Prior to the transfer, the end user receiving the  
Software must agree to all the EULA terms.  
4. CONSENT TO USE OF DATA. You agree that Samsung and  
its affiliates may collect and use technical information  
gathered as part of the product support services related to  
the Software provided to you, if any, related to the Software.  
Samsung may use this information solely to improve its  
products or to provide customized services or technologies to  
you and will not disclose this information in a form that  
personally identifies you.  
7. EXPORT RESTRICTIONS. You acknowledge that the  
Software is subject to export restrictions of various countries.  
You agree to comply with all applicable international and  
national laws that apply to the Software, including the U.S.  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Export Administration Regulations, as well as end user, end  
use, and destination restrictions issued by U.S. and other  
governments.  
and other items of a destructive nature. References on this  
mobile device to any names, marks, products, or services of  
any third-parties are provided solely as a convenience to  
Purchaser, and do not constitute or imply an endorsement,  
sponsorship, or recommendation of, or affiliation with the  
third-party or its products and services. Purchaser agrees  
that SAMSUNG shall not be responsible or liable, directly or  
indirectly, for any damage or loss caused or alleged to  
caused by, or in connection with, use of or reliance on any  
such third-party content, products, or services available on  
or through any such application. Purchaser acknowledges  
and agrees that your use of any third-party application is  
governed by such third-party application provider’s Terms of  
Use, License Agreement, Privacy Policy, or other such  
agreement and that any information or personal data you  
provide, whether knowingly or unknowingly, to such third-  
party application provider, will be subject to such third-party  
application provider’s privacy policy, if such a policy exists.  
SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR ANY  
DISCLOSURE OF INFORMATION OR ANY OTHER PRACTICES  
OF ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER.  
8. TERMINATION. This EULA is effective until terminated. Your  
rights under this License will terminate automatically without  
notice from Samsung if you fail to comply with any of the  
terms and conditions of this EULA. Upon termination of this  
EULA, you must cease all use of the Software and destroy all  
copies, full or partial, of the Software.  
9. THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. Certain third-party  
applications may be included with, or downloaded to this  
mobile device. SAMSUNG makes no representations  
whatsoever about any of these applications. Since SAMSUNG  
has no control over such applications, Purchaser  
acknowledges and agrees that SAMSUNG is not responsible  
for the availability of such applications and is not responsible  
or liable for any content, advertising, products, services, or  
other materials on or available from such applications.  
Purchaser expressly acknowledges and agrees that use of  
third-party applications is at Purchaser’s sole risk and that  
the entire risk of unsatisfactory quality, performance,  
accuracy and effort is with Purchaser. It is up to Purchaser to  
take precautions to ensure that whatever Purchaser selects  
to use is free of such items as viruses, worms, Trojan horses,  
10. Disclaimer of Warranty Regarding Third-Party  
Applications. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT OR MAKE ANY  
REPRESENTATIONS REGARDING THE AVAILABILITY, USE,  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
236  
TIMELINESS, SECURITY, VALIDITY, ACCURACY, OR  
RELIABILITY OF, OR THE RESULTS OF THE USE OF, OR  
OTHERWISE RESPECTING, THE CONTENT OF ANY  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WHETHER SUCH THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATION IS INCLUDED WITH THE PRODUCT  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY  
QUALITY OR WORKMANLIKE EFFORT, FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, RELIABILITY OR AVAILABILITY,  
ACCURACY, LACK OF VIRUSES, QUIET ENJOYMENT,  
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS OR OTHER  
VIOLATION OF RIGHTS. SAMSUNG DOES NOT WARRANT  
AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR ENJOYMENT OF THE  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION, THAT THE FUNCTIONS  
CONTAINED IN THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL MEET  
PURCHASER’S REQUIREMENTS, THAT THE OPERATION OF  
THE THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED  
OR ERROR-FREE, OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATION WILL BE CORRECTED. PURCHASER ASSUMES  
THE ENTIRE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR,  
OR CORRECTION. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW  
EXCLUSIONS OR LIMITATIONS ON HOW LONG AN IMPLIED  
WARRANTY LASTS, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR  
EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NO ADVICE OR  
INFORMATION, WHETHER ORAL OR WRITTEN, OBTAINED BY  
PURCHASER FROM SAMSUNG SHALL BE DEEMED TO ALTER  
THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY REGARDING THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATIONS, OR TO CREATE ANY WARRANTY.  
DISTRIBUTED BY SAMSUNG, IS DOWNLOADED, OR  
OTHERWISE OBTAINED. USE OF ANY THIRD-PARTY  
APPLICATION IS DONE AT PURCHASER’S OWN DISCRETION  
AND RISK AND PURCHASER IS SOLELY RESPONSIBLE FOR  
ANY DAMAGE TO YOUR MOBILE DEVICE OR LOSS OF DATA  
THAT RESULTS FROM THE DOWNLOADING OR USE OF SUCH  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS. SAMSUNG EXPRESSLY  
DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING WHETHER  
PURCHASER’S PERSONAL INFORMATION IS CAPTURED BY  
ANY THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER OR THE USE TO  
WHICH SUCH PERSONAL INFORMATION MAY BE PUT BY  
SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION PROVIDER. ANY  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS PROVIDED WITH THIS MOBILE  
DEVICE ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND ON AN “AS AVAILABLE”  
BASIS, WITHOUT WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND FROM  
SAMSUNG, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. TO THE FULLEST  
EXTENT POSSIBLE PURSUANT TO APPLICABLE LAW,  
SAMSUNG DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESS, IMPLIED,  
OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Limitation of Liability. SAMSUNG WILL NOT BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF OR  
RELATING TO THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE ANY  
THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION, ITS CONTENT OR  
FOREGOING LIMITATIONS, EXCLUSIONS, AND DISCLAIMERS  
(INCLUDING SECTIONS 9, 10, AND 11) SHALL APPLY TO THE  
MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, EVEN IF  
ANY REMEDY FAILS ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.  
FUNCTIONALITY, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO DAMAGES  
CAUSED BY OR RELATED TO ERRORS, OMISSIONS,  
12. U.S. Government End Users Restricted Rights. The  
Software is licensed only with "restricted rights" and as  
"commercial items" consisting of "commercial software"  
and "commercial software documentation" with only those  
rights as are granted to all other end users pursuant to the  
terms and conditions herein. All Software and Products  
provided to the United States Government pursuant to  
solicitations issued on or after December 1, 1995 is provided  
with the commercial rights and restrictions described  
elsewhere herein. All Software and Products provided to the  
United States Government pursuant to solicitations issued  
prior to December 1, 1995 are provided with RESTRICTED  
RIGHTS as provided for in FAR, 48 CFR 52.227-14 (JUNE  
1987) or DFAR, 48 CFR 252.227-7013 (OCT 1988), as  
applicable.  
INTERRUPTIONS, DEFECTS, DELAY IN OPERATION OR  
TRANSMISSION, COMPUTER VIRUS, FAILURE TO CONNECT,  
NETWORK CHARGES, AND ALL OTHER DIRECT, INDIRECT,  
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES EVEN IF SAMSUNG HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME JURISDICTIONS DO  
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION  
OR EXCLUSION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. NOT  
WITHSTANDING THE FOREGOING, SAMSUNG’S TOTAL  
LIABILITY TO PURCHASER FOR ALL LOSSES, DAMAGES,  
CAUSES OF ACTION, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THOSE  
BASED ON CONTRACT, TORT, OR OTHERWISE, ARISING OUT  
OF PURCHASER’S USE OF THIRD-PARTY APPLICATIONS ON  
THIS MOBILE DEVICE, OR ANY OTHER PROVISION OF THIS  
EULA, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE AMOUNT PURCHASER PAID  
SPECIFICALLY FOR ANY SUCH THIRD-PARTY APPLICATION  
THAT WAS INCLUDED WITH THIS MOBILE DEVICE. THE  
13. APPLICABLE LAW. This EULA is governed by the laws of  
TEXAS, without regard to conflicts of laws principles. This  
EULA shall not be governed by the UN Convention on  
Contracts for the International Sale of Goods, the application  
of which is expressly excluded. If a dispute, controversy or  
Warranty Information  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
238  
difference is not amicably settled, it shall be finally resolved  
by arbitration in Seoul, Korea in accordance with the  
Arbitration Rules of the Korean Commercial Arbitration Board.  
The award of arbitration shall be final and binding upon the  
parties.  
14. ENTIRE AGREEMENT; SEVERABILITY. This EULA is the  
entire agreement between you and Samsung relating to the  
Software and supersedes all prior or contemporaneous oral  
or written communications, proposals and representations  
with respect to the Software or any other subject matter  
covered by this EULA. If any provision of this EULA is held to  
be void, invalid, unenforceable or illegal, the other provisions  
shall continue in full force and effect.  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Index  
Contacts  
creating 56  
display options 58  
exporting and importing 61  
groups 62  
joining 60  
linking 60  
namecards 61  
A
B
Accounts  
setting up 55  
Adobe PDF 161  
Alarm  
Back button 23  
Battery  
charging 6  
indicator 6  
Turning Off 148  
AllShare  
configuring 149  
installing and removing 6  
Battery Use & Safety 218  
Bluetooth  
separating joined 60  
setting a photo as contact  
icon 132  
starred contacts 64  
updating 57  
Android keyboard  
configuring 48  
Android System Recovery 16  
App Shortcuts 37  
Application Bar 20, 24  
Application Manager settings  
downloaded apps 188  
running services 188  
Applications 40  
pairing with a device 140  
settings 176  
turning on or off 140  
C
Camcorder  
recording video 124  
settings 124  
Camera  
settings 120  
taking photos 120  
Care and Maintenance 222  
Children and Cell Phones 214  
D
Display / Touch-Screen 220  
Display settings  
auto-rotate screen 183  
brightness 182  
font style 183  
smart stay 182  
timeout 182  
downloading new 159  
Smart Remote 45  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
DivX®  
registration code 207  
Do cell phones pose a health  
hazard? 210  
Downloads  
managing 142  
Dropbox  
Desktop Application  
Download 153  
Google Voice Typing 54  
Google+ 83  
GPS 221  
GPS Applications 146  
Groups  
creating 62  
G
Gallery 129  
sharing photos and video 133  
viewing photos and video 130  
Gmail  
account settings 68  
H
Handwriting 52  
Health and Safety Information 210  
Home button 23  
composing and sending 68  
refreshing your account 66  
setting up your account 65  
E
Google  
Gmail 65  
Email  
Home screen 20  
Combined view 72  
Latitude 91  
Maps 93  
Navigation 96  
Places 98  
Play Store 159  
Search 101  
your account 9  
YouTube 101, 173  
Google Messenger 82  
Google Play 159  
Google Search 167  
adding widgets 34  
primary shortcuts 33  
wallpaper 38  
composing and sending 73  
configuring accounts 70  
Exposure to Radio Frequency (RF)  
Signals 210  
I
Icons  
F
Status Bar 31  
Infrared Blaster 19  
Internet  
app 83  
Quick Controls 91  
Settings 88  
FCC Notice and Cautions 227  
Firmware Update 143  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mini App Tray 21, 39  
Multiscreen 25, 71, 126, 127, 129,  
K
L
P
Pairing with Bluetooth 140  
Peel 45  
Set up 168  
Photo ID  
setting 132  
Photos  
Gallery 129  
sharing 133  
Kies 143  
via Wi-Fi 180  
Music  
add songs to a playlist 109  
creating a playlist 108, 111  
Music Player 111  
N
Namecards  
Language and input settings  
select language 197  
Latitude Settings 95  
Location Services Settings 190  
Locking and Unlocking  
unlocking the keypad 15  
sending 61  
taking 120  
Navigation 23  
command keys 33  
Primary Shortcuts 33  
screen 24  
Navigation button 23  
Nearby Devices  
settings 180  
status 33  
Notification Panel 29  
Notifications 29  
Play Music app 103  
Play Store 159  
Playlists  
adding songs 109  
creating 108, 111  
Polaris® Office 161  
Powering On and Off 8  
Predictive Text 198  
Privacy settings  
factory data reset 201  
M
Maps 93, 156  
Memory Card  
formatting 144  
installing 13  
removing 14  
Menu  
context-sensitive 24  
Messages  
email 70  
O
Q
Gmail 65  
types 65  
Messenger 82  
Operating Environment 225  
Other Important Safety  
Information 227  
Quick Controls 91  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Securing your device  
locking and unlocking 14  
Security  
locking and unlocking 14  
locking your device 15  
Security settings  
device administration 195  
passwords 195  
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR)  
Certification Information 215  
Standard Limited Warranty 229  
Status Bar 31  
Synchronizing account  
auto-sync 190  
R
Reducing Exposure  
Hands-Free Kits and Other  
Accessories 213  
Remote  
Smart 168  
System Recovery 16  
Reset  
factory data 201  
T
trusted credentials 196  
Settings 174  
Responsible Listening 223  
Restricting Children's Access to Your  
Mobile device 227  
S
Samsung Account  
signing in 208  
Samsung Keyboard  
entering text 47  
Samsung Kies 143  
Samsung Mobile Products and  
Recycling 220  
Text  
changing input method 46  
entering 46  
input methods 46  
Turning Your Device On and Off 8  
allow mock locations 206  
developer options 205  
Location Services 190  
USB debugging 205  
Shortcuts 37  
Smart Practices While Driving 217  
Smart Remote  
see Peel 168  
Smart Stay 182  
Snooze 148  
Software Update 208  
Sound settings  
general 181  
U
UL Certified Travel Charger 220  
Update Available 146  
USB connections  
as a mass storage device 145  
USB debugging 205  
USB settings  
as a mass storage device 145  
mass storage device 145  
Windows Media Player 144  
Screen Capture 150  
Search 167  
Google 101  
notifications 181  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
WiFi (see Wi-Fi) 137  
Wi-Fi Direct 33, 138  
Windows Media Player  
synchronizing with 144  
Wireless Networking  
Bluetooth 139  
V
X
XT9 Predictive Text 198  
Y
YouTube 101, 173  
Videos  
Gallery 129  
recording 124  
sharing 133  
Volume Key 19  
Wi-Fi 137  
World Clock 170  
W
Warranty Information 229  
Widgets 33  
Wi-Fi  
adding a connection  
manually 138  
Direct 61  
Direct settings 178  
enabling 91  
scanning and connecting 138  
settings 174  
turning on or off 137, 174  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Q See Home Security System QT426 625 User Guide
Ramsey Electronics Musical Instrument Amplifier PA1 User Guide
Renesas Computer Hardware M34553T PTCB User Guide
RocketFish Surge Protector RF AVS7ES User Guide
Rockford Fosgate Stereo Amplifier PUNCH100 User Guide
RTS Network Card XCP 48 RJ45 User Guide
Salton Mixer FSM126EM, FSM126RM, FSM126BKM, FSM126CBM, FSM126BRXM User Guide
Samsung Network Router SWL 2200U User Guide
Samsung Printer CLX 8380 User Guide
Sennheiser Car Satellite TV System EM2003 User Guide